1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

405
SCM600 Sales and Distribution Processes mySAP ERP Sales and Services Date Training Center Instructors Education Website Participant Handbook Course Version: 2006/Q2 Course Duration: 5 Days Material Number: 50078063 An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Upload: manish-prajapati

Post on 20-Jan-2015

820 views

Category:

Career


206 download

DESCRIPTION

sap sd sales and distribution

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600Sales and Distribution Processes

mySAP ERP Sales and Services

Date

Training Center

Instructors

Education Website

Participant HandbookCourse Version: 2006/Q2Course Duration: 5 DaysMaterial Number: 50078063

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Page 2: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Copyright

Copyright © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose withoutthe express permission of SAP AG. Additionally this publication and its contents are providedsolely for your use, this publication and its contents may not be rented, transferred or sold withoutthe express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed withoutprior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Trademarks

� Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® areregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

� IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®,S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

� ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.� INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered

trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.� UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.� Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,

VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarksof Citrix Systems, Inc.

� HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, WorldWide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

� JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.� JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for

technology invented and implemented by Netscape.� SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP

EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.comare trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countriesall over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks oftheir respective companies.

Disclaimer

THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLYDISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTSCONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANYKIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOSTPROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDEDSOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

Page 3: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

About This HandbookThis handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of thiscourse, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic ConventionsAmerican English is the standard used in this handbook. The followingtypographic conventions are also used.

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. Theseinclude field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as wellas menu names, paths, and options.

Also used for cross-references to other documentationboth internal (in this documentation) and external (inother locations, such as SAPNet).

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles ofgraphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These includereport names, program names, transaction codes, tablenames, and individual key words of a programminglanguage, when surrounded by body text, for exampleSELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory namesand their paths, messages, names of variables andparameters, and passages of the source text of aprogram.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters thatyou enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that youreplace these words and characters with appropriateentries.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii

Page 4: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

About This Handbook SCM600

Icons in Body TextThe following icons are used in this handbook.

Icon Meaning

For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point

Exception or caution

Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor�spresentation.

iv © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 5: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

ContentsCourse Overview ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

Course Goals .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viiCourse Objectives ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Unit 1: Navigation..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Basics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2User-Specific Settings and Help Functions... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution ..... . . . 21General Sales and Distribution Structures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAP ERP ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES,Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Process Overview.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Sales Processing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Shipping Processing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Billing Document Processing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Customer Master. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Material Master.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Customer Material Info Record... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Condition Master Data for Pricing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Additional Master Data .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determinationand Collective Processing ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Function of the Sales Document Type .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171Shipment Scheduling... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Unit 6: Availability Check ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Basics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Sample Scenarios ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229Transportation Processing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v

Page 6: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Contents SCM600

Unit 7: Make-To-Order .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Presales Processing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Function of the Item Category.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Assembly Processing... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

Unit 8: Complaints Processing ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Credit Memo Requests... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Returns .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312Invoice Correction Requests .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes...... . . 335Lists and Reports .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336Sales Information System... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353Business Information Warehouse.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

Unit 10: Integrating SAP ECC and SAP CRM...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales and DistributionEnvironment ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

Unit 11: IMG Overview ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Function of the IMG... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

vi © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 7: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Course OverviewThis training course provides an overview of the processes, organizationalstructures, and master data in sales and distribution. It also explains variousoptions for analyzing the data generated during sales and distribution processes.

The content of the training course is explained using different examples andtopic-related exercises allow you to test what you have learnt. This enables you tofamiliarize yourself with the corresponding terminology used, so that you can usethis documentation effectively.

This training course provides the groundwork to ensure that you can concentrateon the topics covered in subsequent training courses.

Target AudienceThis course is intended for the following audiences:

� Project team leaders� Project team members

Course PrerequisitesRequired Knowledge

� Basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows� Basic knowledge of the business processes involved in sales and distribution

Recommended Knowledge

� SAP01 � SAP Overview� SAPSCM � Overview of the mySAP SCM Solution

Course GoalsThis course will prepare you to:

� Navigate in the system and use the help functions� Become familiar with the central business processes in sales and distribution

processing.� Carry out the key functions in the process chain from the �presales phase

to processing incoming payments� in the system

Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, you will be able to:

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii

Page 8: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Course Overview SCM600

� Maintain the key master data in Sales and Distribution, and name therequired business structures

� Work with the various documents in Sales and Distribution� Describe the points of contact from Sales and Distributionto the materials

management, production (for example, make-to-order) and financialaccounting areas

� Perform analyses for Sales and Distribution processes

SAP Software Component InformationThe information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Componentsand releases:

viii © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 9: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1Navigation

Unit OverviewThis unit gives you an overview of the navigation options within the system.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Name the window elements� Navigate in the SAP System� Use the basic help functions.� Make personal system settings.

Unit ContentsLesson: Basics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Exercise 1: Navigation ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1

Page 10: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Lesson: Basics

Lesson OverviewThis lesson covers the basic principles of system navigation.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the window elements� Navigate in the SAP System� Use the basic help functions.

Business ExampleUsers familiarize themselves with the system interface and record their personaldefault settings.

General Concepts

Figure 1: Logging on to the system

SAP Systems are client systems. The client concept means it is possible to runseveral commercially independent companies in a single system. Each usersession only has access to data from the client they selected when they logged on.

A client is an independent organizational unit in the system. Each client has aseparate data environment and therefore separate master and transaction data,assigned user masters and specific Customizing parameters.

2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 11: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

To enable users to log on to the system, a user master record must be createdfor these users, which relates to the corresponding clients. Access protectionreasons mean that a password is required during the logon. Entry takes place inthe background (�asterisks�).

SAP Systems can use multiple languages. The Language input field is used toselect the logon language that is valid for the current session.

Multiple logons are logged as of SAP R/3Release 4.6. This is due to security andlegal license related issues. Each time the same user logs on to the system, asystem message appears, which offers the user three options:

� End existing session(s), log on again� Log on again without ending any existing session(s) (is logged)� Terminate new logon.

Various options for recording your own texts on the logon screen are available.See SAP Note 205487

Figure 2: SAP Easy Access

SAP Easy Access is the standard access to the system. You navigate in the systemusing a tree structure with a clear overview.

You can display a picture, such as your company logo, on the right hand sideof the screen. This picture can only be defined for the entire system and isclient-independent. Assuming you have the corresponding authorization, a moredetailed description of the settings required is available in the menu under Extras→ Information on Administration. Note that the picture is recorded in the systemand is transported to the front end each time you access SAP Easy Access. Thistransfer is compressed. However, the logo on the initial screen should not belarger than 20 kB. You can prevent this screen from being accessed by either

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 3

Page 12: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

choosing the �Low Speed Connection� in the SAPLogon program (see SAP note161053), or deactivating access of the screen under Extras→ Settings. See alsothe slide �User-Specific Personalization�.

Figure 3: Role-based user menu

A role describes a meaningful number of activities in the system. These representthe functions that a user typically requires for their work center.

To ensure the users of the SAP System can work with user-specific or workcenter-related menus, the profile generator must be used to set up roles.

Roles are also used to assign the authorizations required for activities to beperformed in the menus to users. This includes pre-defined user roles from allapplication areas in the standard system.

If a user has been assigned to a role, they can choose between their user menuand the standard �SAP Menu�.

Roles that are supplied by SAP in the standard system can be accessed using theOther Menu button on the SAP Easy Access initial screen.

In addition to their role, each end user can also personalize their access tothe system using Favorites. You can define a separate Favorites List of thetransactions, reports, files and Web addresses that you use most frequently.

You can create favorites using the menu entry Favorites or simply by using themouse and �drag & drop� to insert them in the directory of favorites.

4 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 13: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

Figure 4: Screen Elements

Command field: In the command field (which is hidden as a default setting), youcan select applications directly by entering the transaction code. The transactioncode for an application is found in the SAP Easy Access menu tree (see page�User-Specific Personalization�) or in the respective application under System→ Status.

Standard toolbar: Buttons from the standard toolbar are available on every SAPscreen. Buttons that cannot be used are grayed out according to the applicationinvolved. If you hold the cursor over a button, a small flag that tells you thename or meaning of the button appears. This also tells you the function keyassignment. The application toolbar shows the buttons that can be used in yourcurrent application.

Check box fields: Check box fields allow you to use several optionssimultaneously within a group.

Radio buttons: These provide you with a selection option in each case.

A tab page is used to improve the overview of several information screens.

Status bar: Shows information on the current system status, such as warningsand errors.

Other elements include:

Menu bar: The menus displayed here are dependent on the respective applicationin which you are currently working. Submenu entries are available in these menus.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 5

Page 14: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Title bar: The title bar contains the name of the function that is available to youhere.

Figure 5: Select Functions

You can access system functions as follows:

� By using the mouse to select a

� Menu entry� Favorites� Entry in SAP Easy Access

� Using the keyboard (ALT + the underlined letter in the menu entry required).� By entering a transaction code in the command field:

A transaction code (T Code) is assigned to each function (noteach screen!) in SAP Systems. You can access the assigned transaction codefrom every screen in the system. To display the customer master data, youcan for example enter �/n� and the associated transaction code: �/nsu3�. Youcan determine the transaction code that applies to current processing usingthe entry Status in the System menu. Other input options:

� �/n � ends the current transaction� �/i� deletes the current session� �/osm04� opens a new session and switches to the transaction specified

(SM04)

The command field can also be accessed from the keyboard. You can use theCTRL+TAB combination here so that the cursor jumps from one (input) fieldgroup to the next.

You can use TAB to do this within a field group.

6 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 15: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

By entering �search_sap_menu� in the command field, you can display the menupaths for the SAP transactions you are looking for. You can also search for textstrings.

Help Functions

Figure 6: Field helps: F1, F4

F1 gives you explanations on fields, menus, functions and messages.

The F1 Help also gives you access to technical information on the respective field.The parameter ID, which you can use to define default entries in fields for youruser, which also reference this parameter ID, is available here.

F4 gives you access to possible entries. You can also access the F4 Help for a fieldby using the pushbutton located directly to the right of the field selected.

If fields contain a �checkmark� symbol, you can only proceed in the respectiveapplication once you have entered an admissible value. Users can also usetransaction or screen variants and Customizing settings to make many fields inan application mandatory or optional fields. These settings can also be used todisplay or hide fields or enter default entries in these fields.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 7

Page 16: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Figure 7: Menus: System and Help

The System menu entry also contains the following:

� Generate/delete session: Generate and delete a session. The maximumnumber of sessions can be defined as a number between 2 and 6 by thesystem administrator using the parameter rdisp/max_alt_modes.

� User profiles: Enter user-specific default settings. You can for instance useparameter IDs under Own Data to define values in certain fields for specificusers in the system (such as the company code field).

� List: Central list functions, such as search according to character strings,save to PC files, printing etc.

� Status: Display the central user and system data� Log off: End the SAP session (with query)

The Help menu entry also contains the following:

� A context-sensitive Application Help� Access information in SAP Library (see next page)� Glossary

8 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 17: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

Figure 8: SAP Library

SAP Systems offer the user comprehensive online help. You can access the helpfrom every screen in the system. You can always request help using the menuentry Help, or the corresponding button (yellow question mark).

Current documentation on SAP Systems can also be accessed from the HelpPortal. The Help Portal is found at http://help.sap.com.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 9

Page 18: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the window elements� Navigate in the SAP System� Use the basic help functions.

10 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 19: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions

Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the user-specific settings.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Make personal system settings.

Business ExampleThe user-specific default settings help you use the system more efficiently.

Personal Settings

Figure 9: User-specific personalization

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 11

Page 20: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

The system features a wide range of personalization options for end users. Theseinclude:

� Under Extras→ Settings, you can change the layout of the initial screen (forexample, by hiding the image on the right-hand side of the screen or bydisplaying the technical name (transaction code) in the SAP Easy Accessmenu).

� Under Customizing of Local Layout, you can activate a quick cut/copyoption, for example. Under Options..., you can change the response speed ofthe �quick info� function, which is displayed when you move your cursorover an icon or pushbutton.

� You can set your personal default values by choosing System→ User Profile→ Own Data. You can also choose the Address, Defaults, and Parameterstab pages. The example below shows you how to set the parameters:

� Parameter: here, you can default the settings for input fields that arefrequently used. A prerequisite here, however, is that a parameter IDhas been assigned to the input field in question. How to find theparameters: position your cursor on the input field for which youwant to make a default setting. Choose F1 and then the �TechnicalInformation� pushbutton. An info window is now displayed that showsthe corresponding parameter ID under �Field data� (provided that a�parameter ID� has been assigned to the field).

12 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 21: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions

Exercise 1: Navigation

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Log on to an SAP system� Identify transaction codes� Access information in SAP Library� Use F1 Help to find field information� Use F4 Help to find possible field values

Business ExampleAs a newcomer to the SAP system, you can use menu paths and transaction codesto navigate in the system and use the various online help options.

Task 1:

1. Select the system required for this training session. Use the client, username, initial password, and logon language specified by your instructor.When you log on for the first time, a window is displayed in which you haveto enter your own new password twice.

Note:

Client: ___________

User: ___________

Password: ___________

Language: ___________

Task 2:

1. What is the maximum number of sessions (windows in the SAP system) thatyou can have open simultaneously?

Number: _____

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 13

Page 22: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Task 3:

1. What is the name of the following function accessed via the standard SAPmenu and what transaction code do you use to start this function?

Tools→ Administration→Monitor→ System Monitoring→ User Overview

Name of function: _________

Transaction code:_________

Task 4:The help functions

1. Use either the system menu or enter transaction code SU3 to call up thescreen in which you can maintain your own user data. Call up the F1 Helpfor a selection of fields here. Choose Technical Information to find theparameter ID for the Logon Language field.

Parameter ID: __________

Call up the F4 Help for the Logon Language field. What is the language keyfor Ukrainian?

Language key: __________

2. Display the transaction code for the current transaction in the status bar.

Task 5:Default user-specific settings by choosing System→ User Profile→ Own Data.

1. Set the logon language to the one used on your course.

2. Specify the decimal notation you require and the appropriate data format.

Task 6:Maintain your personal favorites.

1. Create at least one new folder in the favorites folder.

2. Add two of your favorite transactions to this folder.

3. Add the Internet address http://www.sap.com under the title SAP Homepage.

Continued on next page

14 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 23: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions

Task 7:Define a start transaction in the Extras menu.

1. Set a transaction of your choice as the start transaction. Once you have donethis, you must log off and then log on again to activate this change.

Hint: If required, you can restore the original start transaction bysimply deleting your entry.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 15

Page 24: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Solution 1: NavigationTask 1:

1. Select the system required for this training session. Use the client, username, initial password, and logon language specified by your instructor.When you log on for the first time, a window is displayed in which you haveto enter your own new password twice.

Note:

Client: ___________

User: ___________

Password: ___________

Language: ___________

a) Log on to the system specified by your instructor and change yourinitial password.

Task 2:

1. What is the maximum number of sessions (windows in the SAP system) thatyou can have open simultaneously?

Number: _____

a) To open and close sessions, choose System→ Create Session (or thecorresponding pushbutton) and System→ End Session.

Depending on your system settings, a maximum of six sessions can beopened in one user session.

Task 3:

1. What is the name of the following function accessed via the standard SAPmenu and what transaction code do you use to start this function?

Tools→ Administration→Monitor→ System Monitoring→ User Overview

Name of function: _________

Continued on next page

16 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 25: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions

Transaction code:_________

a) User list

b) To find out the transaction code, choose System→ Status.

SM04

Task 4:The help functions

1. Use either the system menu or enter transaction code SU3 to call up thescreen in which you can maintain your own user data. Call up the F1 Helpfor a selection of fields here. Choose Technical Information to find theparameter ID for the Logon Language field.

Parameter ID: __________

Call up the F4 Help for the Logon Language field. What is the language keyfor Ukrainian?

Language key: __________

a) The Logon Language field is on the Defaults tab page. When you callup the F1 Help and then choose Technical Information, you can see thatthe parameter ID for this field is SPR.

Default the setting as specified in the exercise description. Thelanguage key for Ukrainian is UK.

2. Display the transaction code for the current transaction in the status bar.

a) In the status bar, choose the pushbutton for selecting the displayoptions and choose Transaction. From now on, the transaction codefor every transaction code you call up will be displayed in the statusbar of this session.

Task 5:Default user-specific settings by choosing System→ User Profile→ Own Data.

1. Set the logon language to the one used on your course.

a) To set the logon language, call up the user profile (System→ UserProfile→ Own Data) and then choose the Defaults tab page. UnderLogon Language, enter the required language.

2. Specify the decimal notation you require and the appropriate data format.

a) See 1. a)

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 17

Page 26: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 1: Navigation SCM600

Task 6:Maintain your personal favorites.

1. Create at least one new folder in the favorites folder.

a) To create a sub-order under Favorites, choose Favorites→ Insertfolder. Choose an appropriate name for the folder. You can create asmany folders as you require. The folders can also be moved usingthe Drag&Drop function.

2. Add two of your favorite transactions to this folder.

a) To create favorites, look through the menu tree of the standard SAPmenu to find some applications (transactions) that you need asfavorites. To copy an entry to your favorites list, select the transactionand choose Favorites→ Add. Favorites can also be moved to differentfolders by choosing Favorites→ Move. You can also move them usingthe "drag & drop" function.

3. Add the Internet address http://www.sap.com under the title SAP Homepage.

a) To create an Internet address, choose Favorites→ Add other objects.

Task 7:Define a start transaction in the Extras menu.

1. Set a transaction of your choice as the start transaction. Once you have donethis, you must log off and then log on again to activate this change.

Hint: If required, you can restore the original start transaction bysimply deleting your entry.

a) Choose Extras→ Set start transaction.

Enter a transaction of your choice and confirm it with "Enter". Thesystem message in the status bar informs you that this transaction willbe the start transaction the next time you log on.

Hint: To remove the start transaction, follow the menu pathdescribed above and delete the transaction code you entered.The next time you log on to the system, the initial SAP EasyAccess is displayed again.

18 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 27: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: User-Specific Settings and Help Functions

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Make personal system settings.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 19

Page 28: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Name the window elements� Navigate in the SAP System� Use the basic help functions.� Make personal system settings.

20 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 29: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2Enterprise Structures in Sales and

Distribution

Unit OverviewThis unit describes how a company's sales and distribution structures can bemapped in the system. This is illustrated in more detail with the model companyIDES.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Describe sales and distribution structures.� Name the organizational units relevant to sales and distribution in the SAP

ERP Central Component system� Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units� Explain the most important relationships between the organizational

structures in sales and distribution� Describe the sales and distribution structures of IDES, Inc.

Unit ContentsLesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAP ERP.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES,Inc. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Exercise 2: Organizational Structures .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 21

Page 30: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces general sales and distribution structures, which aredescribed using IDES Inc. as an example.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe sales and distribution structures.

Business Example� Your company IDES, Inc. is part of the globally operating IDES group.� IDES, Inc. produces and sells motorcycles. Assemblies are delivered from

plants in Europe and North America.� In addition, your company serves the market with assemblies and spare parts.� IDES, Inc. usually uses authorized dealers that only sell IDES, Inc. vehicles.

General Sales and Distribution Structures

Figure 10: Organizational Structure of IDES Holding Inc.

An important step is to define the organizational structures. It requires thoroughanalysis of how your organization wants to run its business.

22 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 31: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures

The system demonstrations provided by the instructor and the exercises for thistraining course use the model company IDES as an example.

IDES means Internet Demonstration and Evaluation System.

The consolidated group, the IDES Holding AG, is divided into severalindependently operating subsidiaries. The companies that are relevant for thiscourse belong to these subsidiaries: IDES AG in Frankfurt and IDES US INCin New York.

Figure 11: Sales and Distribution Structures of IDES AG

IDES AG has two branch offices for its sales and distribution activities. Materialsfor different product lines, such as motorbikes or paints, are distributed fromHamburg and Berlin via different distribution channels.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 23

Page 32: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Figure 12: Delivery Structure of IDES AG

Hint: This illustration shows the delivery structure within IDES AG,independently from the system (using general business terms).

Before IDES AG confirms an order for a customer, they check from whichwarehouse distribution center the material ordered is to be delivered andwhether sufficient stock is available.

The goods delivery is usually organized at these locations. These facilitiesare not available at every location where products are manufactured.

To fulfill urgent customer requests, the warehouse distribution center inHamburg can arrange express deliveries.

24 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 33: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: General Sales and Distribution Structures

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe sales and distribution structures.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 25

Page 34: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAPERP

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces organizational elements available in the system for mappingsales and distribution structures.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Name the organizational units relevant to sales and distribution in the SAPERP Central Component system

� Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units� Explain the most important relationships between the organizational

structures in sales and distribution

Business ExampleYour company IDES, Inc. is part of the globally operating IDES group. IDES,Inc. produces and sells motorcycles. Assemblies are delivered from plants inEurope and North America. In addition, your company serves the market withassemblies and spare parts. IDES, Inc. usually uses authorized dealers that onlysell IDES, Inc. vehicles.

Overview

Figure 13: Organizational Units in Sales and Distribution

26 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 35: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAP ERP

Organizational units in the SAP system represent the structure of an enterpriseorganization. In other words, organizational units are legal and/or organizationalunits in an enterprise.

mySAP ERP Sales and Service uses a range of organizational units designedexclusively for mapping sales and distribution processes, such as the salesorganization and distribution channel. Other organizational units, such as thecompany code or plant, are required in Sales and Distribution and other systemareas.

The organizational units outlined here are just some of the ones relevant to salesand distribution processes in the system.

Sales

Figure 14: Organizational Units: Company Code

For a company code, a complete independent accounting unit can be representedas the smallest organizational unit of external accounting. This includes theentry of all accountable transactions and the creation of all proofs for a legallyrequired individual account closing, such as the balance sheets and the profitand loss statement.

Examples of a company code are: a company within a corporate group, or asubsidiary.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 27

Page 36: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Figure 15: Organizational Units: Sales Organization

The sales organization is an organizational unit in Logistics which groups theenterprise according to the requirements of sales and distribution. A salesorganization is responsible for distributing goods and services. Therefore, it is alsoliable for the sold products and responsible for the customers' rights of recourse.

The sales organization is also used to take, for example, a regional, national orinternational subdivision of the market into account.

A sales organization is uniquely assigned to a company code. More than one salesorganization can be assigned to a company code. To use the sales and distributionfunctions in the system, you need at least one sales organization.

In the sales statistics, the sales organization is the highest summation level. Allsales and distribution documents, that is, all orders, outbound deliveries, andbilling documents, are assigned to a sales organization.

28 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 37: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAP ERP

Figure 16: Organizational Units: Distribution Channel

The distribution channel characterizes the way in which goods and services aredistributed.

Several distribution channels can be assigned to a sales organization. To use thesales and distribution functions in the system, you need at least one distributionchannel. In this way, you can, among other things:

� Define responsibilities� Carry out flexible price structuring� Differentiate sales statistics

Figure 17: Organizational Units: Division

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 29

Page 38: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

A division is used to group materials and services.

Several divisions can be assigned to a sales organization. To use the sales anddistribution functions in the system, you need at least one division.

A division can represent a certain product group, for example. Therefore, you can,for example, restrict price agreements with a customer to a certain division. Inaddition, you can conduct statistical analysis by division.

Figure 18: Sales Area

A sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution channel, anddivision. It defines the distribution channel a sales organization uses to sellproducts of a certain division.

Each sales and distribution document is assigned to exactly one sales area. Thisassignment cannot be changed.

A sales area can belong to only one company code. This relationship is created byassigning the sales organization.

When processing sales and distribution documents, the system accesses variousmaster data depending on the sales area. This master data includes, for example,customer master data, material master data, prices, and discounts. The system alsocarries out a number of checks concerning the validity of certain entries accordingto the sales area.

Hint: A simple organizational structure may often be better than acomplex one. It simplifies the master data maintenance, for example.You should not define complex organizational structures in order to havedetailed reporting options. You are advised to use the fields in the masterdata screen and documents for this purpose.

30 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 39: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAP ERP

Shipping

Figure 19: Organizational Units: Plant and Storage Location

The plant is a location where material stock is kept and could, for example,represent a production facility in the system.

The plant and storage location are organizational units that can be used by alllogistic areas of the system.

� Materials management is primarily concerned with the material flow. From amaterials management point of view, a plant is, above all, a location wherematerial stock is kept.

� In production, a plant can represent a manufacturing facility.� In sales and distribution, a plant represents the location from which materials

and services are distributed and corresponds to a distribution center. Therelevant stocks are kept here.

In sales and distribution, the plant has a central function:

� To use the sales and distribution functions in the system, you need at leastone plant.

� Each plant is uniquely assigned to a company code.� The assignment between sales organizations and plants does not have to be

unique.� The plant is essential for determining the shipping point.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 31

Page 40: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Figure 20: Organizational Unit: Shipping Point

Shipping is an integrated module of sales and distribution processing. Theshipping point is the highest-level organizational unit of shipping that controlsyour shipping activities. Each outbound delivery is processed by exactly oneshipping point.

The shipping point can be a loading ramp, a mail depot, or a rail depot. It canalso be, for example, a group of employees responsible (only) for organizingvery urgent deliveries.

The organizational assignment of the shipping point is carried out at plant level.More than one shipping point can be assigned to a plant. More than one plantcan also be assigned to a shipping point, although this is only recommended forplants that are close to each other.

32 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 41: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures in mySAP ERP

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Name the organizational units relevant to sales and distribution in the SAP

ERP Central Component system� Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units� Explain the most important relationships between the organizational

structures in sales and distribution

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 33

Page 42: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the ModelCompany IDES, Inc.

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces the organizational elements of sales and distribution usingIDES, Inc. as an example.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the sales and distribution structures of IDES, Inc.

Business ExampleThe use of sales-and-distribution-specific organizational elements is illustratedusing IDES, Inc. as an example.

Sales and Distribution Structures of IDES, Inc.

Figure 21: IDES Holding AG in the System

IDES Holding AG is a globally operating group.

The subsidiaries of IDES Holding AG are organized according to country-specificsituations and laws. Two of these subsidiaries are IDES AG in Frankfurt,Germany, and IDES, Inc. in New York.

34 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 43: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

Representation in the system:

� Company code 1000 IDES US INC� Company code 3000 IDES US INC

Sales and distribution of IDES AG in Germany is organized at two different salesfacilities, each of which has its clearly defined area of responsibility.

Representation in the system:

� Sales organization 1000 Frankfurt� Sales organization 1020 Berlin

Each sales organization is responsible for sales in its country and sets its owndistribution and pricing policies.

Figure 22: IDES AG Sales Areas in the System

Sales processes in the SAP ERP central component are always uniquely assignedto a sales area.

In order to represent the different ways through which goods reach the customer,the appropriate distribution channels were set up. In this course, those IDES AGsales areas are used that contain the following distribution channels:

� 12 Resale� 14 Service

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 35

Page 44: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

In order to represent the different product lines , the appropriate divisions were setup. In this course, those sales areas are used that contain the following distributionchannels:

� 00 Cross-division� 02 Motorcycles� 08 Services

Sales areas were set up on the basis of these sales organizations, distributionchannels, and divisions. However, only these combinations were considered inwhich sales and distributions processes had to be represented. These include

� Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00� Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 02� Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 14, division 08

Figure 23: Shipping at the IDES AG in the System

Before IDES AG confirms an order for a customer, they check from whichdelivering plant the material ordered is to be delivered and whether sufficientstock is available.

The plants of IDES AG include, for example:

� Plant 1000 Hamburg� Plant 1100 Berlin� Plant 1300 Frankfurt� Plant 1400 Stuttgart

36 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 45: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

In addition, delivering plants need to have assigned a sales organization anda distribution channel:

� Plant 1000 in Hamburg and plant 1400 in Stuttgart are delivering plants forsales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12.

� Plant 1100 Berlin is the delivering plant for sales organization 1020 anddistribution channel 20.

� Plant 1300 Frankfurt is not a delivering plant for sales and distribution.

The delivery is organized by various shipping points which are assigned to thedelivering plants:

� Shipping point 1000 Hamburg processes outbound deliveries from plant 1000� Shipping point 1100 Berlin processes outbound deliveries from plant 1100

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 37

Page 46: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

38 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 47: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

Exercise 2: Organizational Structures

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Explain the organizational units and their relationships which are relevant for

sales and distribution� Describe the sales and distribution structures of the case company IDES, Inc.

Business ExampleThe case company IDES, Inc. is a globally operating group. They manufactureproducts (for example, motorcycles and spare parts) of multiple product linesat various locations. These materials, as well as other materials, that are notproduced in-house are distributed by several sales facilities using multipledistribution channels.

Task 1:Organizational Units in Sales and Distribution.

1. Organizational units in the system represent the structure of an enterpriseorganization. Which organizational units represent only sales anddistribution?

2. Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a salesfacility or a sales subsidiary?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 39

Page 48: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

3. Which organizational units can you use in the system to represent a means toship goods to the customer (for example, factory sales, whole sales trade,or retail trade)?

4. Which organizational units can you use in the system to represent differentproduct lines and to group materials (for example, vehicles, accessories,or spare parts)?

5. Which organizational units can you use in the system to organize and processoutbound deliveries from different places (for example, loading ramp orrail depot)?

Task 2:Cross-sales organizational units

1. A corporate group can be divided up into several companies or subsidiaries.Which organizational unit can you use in financial accounting to represent alegal entity and an independent accounting unit in the system?

Continued on next page

40 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 49: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

2. In a company, you can manufacture and store materials in different places.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a productionfacility or a distribution center?

3. Within a plant, material storage can be divided up according to variouslocations or rooms. Which organizational unit can you use in the system torepresent such a location or room?

Task 3:Assigning organizational units

1. Which organizational units does a sales area consist of?

2. Can you assign more than one distribution channel to a sales organization?

3. Can you assign a distribution channel to multiple sales organizations?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 41

Page 50: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

4. Which organizational unit is a sales organization assigned to in order torepresent the connection of sales and distribution processes to financialaccounting?

5. Can you assign a sales organization to multiple company codes?

6. In a sales organization, can you sell materials from multiple deliveringplants?

7. To which organizational unit do you assign a shipping point?

8. Can you assign a shipping point to multiple plants?

Continued on next page

42 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 51: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

9. In which organization unit are storage locations grouped together?

Task 4:Organizational units of IDES, Inc.

1. The subsidiaries of IDES Holding Inc. are organized according tocountry-specific situations and laws. In Germany, IDES AG is a subsidiary,in the USA, IDES US INC. is a subsidiary. Which organizational unit andnumber is used to represent these subsidiaries in the system?

2. Two sales facilities organize the sales and distribution process for IDES AGin Germany (for this training course). Which organizational unit and numberis used to represent the two sales facilities in the system?

3. Which distribution channels does sales organization 1000 use (for thistraining course)?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 43

Page 52: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

4. Which sales areas were set up for sales organization 1000 (for this trainingcourse)?

5. Which plants are assigned to company code 1000 IDES AG (for this trainingcourse)?

6. Which shipping point processes outbound deliveries from plant 1000Hamburg (for this training course)?

Task 5:Organizational units in the system

When you create a sales order, you always have to enter a sales area (salesorganization, distribution channel, division).

1. In the system, check which sales organizations exist for sales order entry forthe USA: Write down three examples.

Hint: To create a sales order, choose Logistics→ Sales andDistribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create. Place the cursor on theinput field for the sales organization and display the possible inputvalues using the F4 input help.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

44 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 53: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

2. Check in the system, which distribution channels exist for sales organization1000: Write down three examples.

Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the distribution channeland display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

3. Check in the system, which divisions exist for sales organization 1000 andfor distribution channel 12. Write down three examples.

Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the sales organizationand display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 45

Page 54: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Solution 2: Organizational StructuresTask 1:Organizational Units in Sales and Distribution.

1. Organizational units in the system represent the structure of an enterpriseorganization. Which organizational units represent only sales anddistribution?

Answer: Sales AreaSales organizationDistribution channelDivisionShipping pointThe sales organization, distribution channel, and division form the sales area.Apart from these, there are also other organizational units that are used forsales and distribution. Other organizational units, such as company code,plant, or storage location, are not only used by sales and distribution, but alsoby other areas (for example, financial accounting, materials management,or production).

2. Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a salesfacility or a sales subsidiary?

Answer: Sales organization

3. Which organizational units can you use in the system to represent a means toship goods to the customer (for example, factory sales, whole sales trade,or retail trade)?

Answer: Distribution channel

4. Which organizational units can you use in the system to represent differentproduct lines and to group materials (for example, vehicles, accessories,or spare parts)?

Answer: Division

5. Which organizational units can you use in the system to organize and processoutbound deliveries from different places (for example, loading ramp orrail depot)?

Answer: Shipping point

Continued on next page

46 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 55: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

Task 2:Cross-sales organizational units

1. A corporate group can be divided up into several companies or subsidiaries.Which organizational unit can you use in financial accounting to represent alegal entity and an independent accounting unit in the system?

Answer: Company code

2. In a company, you can manufacture and store materials in different places.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a productionfacility or a distribution center?

Answer: Plant

3. Within a plant, material storage can be divided up according to variouslocations or rooms. Which organizational unit can you use in the system torepresent such a location or room?

Answer: Storage location

Task 3:Assigning organizational units

1. Which organizational units does a sales area consist of?

Answer: The sales organization, distribution channel, and division formthe sales area.

2. Can you assign more than one distribution channel to a sales organization?

Answer: Yes. You can assign more than one distribution channel to a salesorganization.

3. Can you assign a distribution channel to multiple sales organizations?

Answer: Yes. You can assign a distribution channel to multiple salesorganizations.

4. Which organizational unit is a sales organization assigned to in order torepresent the connection of sales and distribution processes to financialaccounting?

Answer: To the company code.

5. Can you assign a sales organization to multiple company codes?

Answer: No. A sales organization is assigned to only one company code.However, more than one sales organization can be assigned to a companycode.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 47

Page 56: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

6. In a sales organization, can you sell materials from multiple deliveringplants?

Answer: Yes. In a sales organization, you can sell materials from multipledelivering plants.

7. To which organizational unit do you assign a shipping point?

Answer: The shipping point is assigned to a plant.

8. Can you assign a shipping point to multiple plants?

Answer: Yes. A shipping point can also be assigned to multiple plants.However, this might only be appropriate when the plants are in physicalproximity to each other.

9. In which organization unit are storage locations grouped together?

Answer: To the plant.

Task 4:Organizational units of IDES, Inc.

1. The subsidiaries of IDES Holding Inc. are organized according tocountry-specific situations and laws. In Germany, IDES AG is a subsidiary,in the USA, IDES US INC. is a subsidiary. Which organizational unit andnumber is used to represent these subsidiaries in the system?

Answer: Company code 1000: IDES AG GermanyCompany code 3000: IDES US INC USA

2. Two sales facilities organize the sales and distribution process for IDES AGin Germany (for this training course). Which organizational unit and numberis used to represent the two sales facilities in the system?

Answer: Sales organization 1000: FrankfurtSales organization 1020: Berlin

3. Which distribution channels does sales organization 1000 use (for thistraining course)?

Answer: Distribution channel 12: ResaleDistribution channel 14: Service

4. Which sales areas were set up for sales organization 1000 (for this trainingcourse)?

Answer: Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 02Sales organization 1000, distribution channel 14, division 08

Continued on next page

48 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 57: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

5. Which plants are assigned to company code 1000 IDES AG (for this trainingcourse)?

Answer: Plant 1000: HamburgPlant 1100: BerlinPlant 1300: FrankfurtPlant 1400: Stuttgart

6. Which shipping point processes outbound deliveries from plant 1000Hamburg (for this training course)?

Answer: Shipping point 1000: Hamburg

Task 5:Organizational units in the system

When you create a sales order, you always have to enter a sales area (salesorganization, distribution channel, division).

1. In the system, check which sales organizations exist for sales order entry forthe USA: Write down three examples.

Hint: To create a sales order, choose Logistics→ Sales andDistribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create. Place the cursor on theinput field for the sales organization and display the possible inputvalues using the F4 input help.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Sales organization for the USA:

� 3000 USA Philadelphia� 3020 USA Denver� R300 Retail USA� S300 Service USA

2. Check in the system, which distribution channels exist for sales organization1000: Write down three examples.

Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the distribution channeland display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 49

Page 58: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 2: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution SCM600

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Distribution channels for sales organization 1000:

� 01 direct sales� 10 Final customer sales� 12 Resale� 14 Service� 16 Factory sales

3. Check in the system, which divisions exist for sales organization 1000 andfor distribution channel 12. Write down three examples.

Hint: Place the cursor on the input field for the sales organizationand display the possible input values using the F4 input help.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Divisions for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12:

� 00 Cross-division� 02 Motorcycles� 04 Lighting� 07 High Tech� 10 Vehicles

50 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 59: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales and Distribution Structures of the Model Company IDES, Inc.

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the sales and distribution structures of IDES, Inc.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 51

Page 60: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe sales and distribution structures.� Name the organizational units relevant to sales and distribution in the SAP

ERP Central Component system� Describe the essential characteristics of these organizational units� Explain the most important relationships between the organizational

structures in sales and distribution� Describe the sales and distribution structures of IDES, Inc.

52 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 61: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3Overview of Sales Processes

Unit OverviewThis unit looks at the system procedures involved in the sales and distributionprocess. This take the form of an initial overview. Additional details can becovered in the units that follow.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Explain the process chain for sales order processing� Create a sales order with reference to a quotation� Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order� Pick and post goods issue� Invoice a customer for the delivery� Enter an incoming payment in the system

Unit ContentsLesson: Process Overview .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Lesson: Sales Processing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Lesson: Shipping Processing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Lesson: Billing Document Processing... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Exercise 3: Sales and Distribution Process... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 53

Page 62: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Lesson: Process Overview

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of sales and distribution processes.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain the process chain for sales order processing

Business ExampleYou want to gain a theoretical overview of sales and distribution processes.

Process Overview

Figure 24: Presales Activities

Specific marketing measures (direct mailing campaigns, Internet campaigns,trade fair sales activities, or telephone campaigns, for example) can trigger salesprocesses.

Possible sequences of such campaigns can be a non-binding customer inquiry or arequest for a quotation. Inquiries and quotations help you to determine importantsales related data and can be saved as documents. If the customer then places anorder, this data can be accessed.

54 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 63: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Process Overview

Use this presales information to plan and evaluate your marketing and salesstrategies and as a basis for establishing long term business relationships withyour customers, for example by:

� tracking lost sales� recording presales data to help negotiate large contracts� selling goods and services to large organizations that require documentation

of the entire process.

Figure 25: Sales Order Processing

A sales order is an electronic document that captures and records your customer'srequest for goods or services.

The sales order contains all pertinent information to process the customer's requestthroughout the whole process cycle.

The sales component thus automatically suggests data from master records andcontrol tables that you previously put aside. As a result, possible input errorsoccurring during sales order processing and entering of redundant data is avoided.

You can enter a sales order with many items in a single screen.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 55

Page 64: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Figure 26: Procurement

The way in which a material is obtained for a customer order can depend on thematerial itself as well as on the sales transaction.

The procurement can, for example:

� result from available stock� be guaranteed by replenishment (purchase requisition or purchase order,

planned order or production order, for example)� trigger a make-to-order production� order the outbound delivery via external suppliers (third-party business

transaction)� organize the outbound delivery via another warehouse (stock transfer)

56 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 65: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Process Overview

Figure 27: Shipping

Shipping processing in Sales and Distribution begins when you create the deliverydocument. The delivery document controls, supports and monitors numerous subprocesses for shipping processing, such as:

� (Optional) picking and confirming (transfer orders)� (Optional) packing� (Optional) planning and monitoring of transport (shipment document)� Posting the goods issue (goods issue documents)

Creating a delivery document includes copying information from the sales order,such as the materials and quantities, onto the delivery document.

Creating a transfer order includes copying data from the delivery document to thetransfer order for processing within the warehouse. The transfer order is essentialfor controlling the movement of goods within your warehouse. It is based ona simple principle: where the goods are taken from and brought to within thewarehouse.

The posting of the goods issue can bring about a change based on a quantity basisas well as on a value basis in stock. Changes based on a value basis are made onthe relevant balance sheet accounts in financial accounting.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 57

Page 66: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Figure 28: Billing

Creating a billing document includes copying information from the sales order andthe delivery document onto the billing document. As a result, delivery items andorder items (services, for example) can be models for the billing document.

The billing document serves several important functions:

� It is the sales and distribution document that acts as the basis for creatinginvoices.

� The billing document serves as a data source for financial accounting to helpyou to monitor and process customer payments.

When you create a billing document, the G/L accounts are normally determinedautomatically and the relevant data is posted.

The system carries out the following:

� a debit posting on the customer's receivables account� a credit posting on the revenue account.

58 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 67: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Process Overview

Figure 29: Payment

When you post an incoming payment, the data on the relevant G/L accounts isposted automatically.

The system carries out the following:

� a debit posting on the cash account� a credit memo on the customer's receivables account

Figure 30: Master Data in Sales and Distribution

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 59

Page 68: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

This slide represents the link between the sub processes in Customer OrderManagement within the system. The structure of the blocks from top to bottomrepresents the normal sequence of events in the sales and distribution process.

The boxes within the various blocks represent sales and financial accountingdocuments.

� Sales activities and promotions are documents for sales support withinpresales.

� Sales documents are documents that are entered during presales andsales order processing. Inquiries, quotations, sales activities, schedulingagreements and standard orders are examples of sales document types.

� Outbound deliveries, transfer requests and transfers are documents withinshipping processing.

� The goods issue document contains changes involving stock and is the basisfor the relevant accounting documents.

� The billing document is a document in the invoicing area and is the basis ofthe relevant accounting documents.

The left and right sections of this slide represent key interfaces between Salesand Distribution and the Sales Information System, Materials Management, andProduction Planning.

60 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 69: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Process Overview

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the process chain for sales order processing

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 61

Page 70: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Lesson: Sales Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces the sales documents used in standard sales and distributionprocesses.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Create a sales order with reference to a quotation

Business ExampleYou will learn how to create a sales order with reference to a quotation.

Sales Processing

Figure 31: Creating an Order

A sales document is always created within a sales area.

A sales order can, therefore, apply to a transaction that already exists. Forexample, one or more inquiries and/or quotations can be reference documents. Inthis case, the system copies the relevant data to the sales order.

Similarly, a quotation can lead to several sales orders.

62 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 71: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Processing

Figure 32: Sales Document Structure

A sales document is divided into three levels: header, item, and schedule line.The data is distributed across these levels accordingly.

� Sales document headerThe data for the document header is valid for theentire document. This includes, for example, customer-related data.

� Items in the sales documentEach item in the sales document has separate data.This includes, for example, data about materials and quantities ordered.Each sales document can contain several items, whereby the individual itemscan be controlled differently. Examples include material item, service item,free-of-charge item or text item.

� Schedule lines for line itemsSchedule lines contain delivery quantities anddelivery dates. They clearly belong to an item. Every item that is to includean outbound delivery in the further sales and distribution process mustpossess at least a schedule line. The item can have several schedule lines, forexample when the quantity ordered is to be delivered in several partialdeliveries at different times.

In order that the sales documents are processed efficiently, the data can be read andprocessed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, header anditem screens. As a rule, a new sales document is entered on an overview screen.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 63

Page 72: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create a sales order with reference to a quotation

64 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 73: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipping Processing

Lesson: Shipping Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces the shipping documents used in standard sales anddistribution processes.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order� Pick and post goods issue

Business ExampleYou will be introduced to some of the sub-steps involved in shipping.

Shipping Processing

Figure 33: Creating an Outbound Delivery

Outbound deliveries are created for orders that are ready to be shipped. Thesystem copies the relevant data from the order to the outbound delivery.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 65

Page 74: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

You can create one or more outbound deliveries from the order. You can alsocombine items from more than one order in an outbound delivery. To combinethem successfully, the orders must correspond with the characteristics that areessential for the shipping process, for example:

� Shipping point� Due date� Ship-to address

The system can create deliveries either on-line or as a background job to beexecuted during off-peak hours.

Figure 34: Structure of delivery document

A delivery document is grouped into two levels: header and item. The data isdistributed across these levels accordingly.

� Delivery document headerThe data for the document header is valid for theentire document. This includes, for example, data for the ship-to party anddeadlines for shipping processing.

� Delivery document itemEach item in the delivery document contains its owndata. This includes, for example, data about materials,quantities, and weights, as well as stock information.Each delivery document can contain several items, whereby the individualitems can be controlled differently. Examples include material items,free-of-charge items, or text items.

66 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 75: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipping Processing

Unlike sales documents, delivery documents do not contain schedule lines. Aschedule line in the sales document can become an item in the delivery document.

To ensure that the delivery documents are processed efficiently, the data can beread and processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview,header and item screens.

Figure 35: Picking

You create a transfer order for an outbound delivery.

A transfer order is generated for a warehouse number. During this process, onlythe deliveries that are necessary for picking are taken into account. The systemcopies the relevant data from the delivery.

The system can combine more than one outbound delivery in a group of transferorders provided that the same warehouse number is used. Selection for outbounddelivery can be further restricted via the picking date or the choice of certainshipping points, for example.

To optimize picking, you can create picking lists that contain materials fromdifferent outbound deliveries. In order to relieve the work for the picker, you cansort the list according to storage bin and material and also calculate the quantitiesper material.

The system can create transfer orders either on-line or as a background job to beexecuted during off-peak hours.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 67

Page 76: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Figure 36: Posting Goods Issue

When the goods issue is posted, the following is carried out automatically:

� The quantity in inventory management and the delivery requirements inmaterials planning are updated.

� The value change in the balance sheet accounts for inventory accounting isposted (the postings from the relevant accounting document are based on thecost of the material).

� The system creates further documents for Financial Accounting.� The billing due list is generated.� The status in all relevant sales documents is updated.

68 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 77: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipping Processing

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order� Pick and post goods issue

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 69

Page 78: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the function and use of billing documents within the standardsales and distribution process.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Invoice a customer for the delivery� Enter an incoming payment in the system

Business ExampleYou will be introduced to the steps involved in billing and processing incomingpayments.

Billing Document Processing

Figure 37: Creating a Billing Document

You can create an invoice for a single delivery or sales order.

70 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 79: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

The system can combine a number of outbound deliveries in one billing documentprovided that they have the same characteristics, such as:

� Payer� Billing date� Destination country

The system can create invoices either on-line or as a background job to beexecuted during off-peak hours.

Figure 38: Billing Document Structure

A billing document is grouped into two levels: header and item. The data isdistributed across these levels accordingly.

� Billing document headerThe data for the document header is valid for theentire document. This includes, for example, data about the payer andbilling date.

� Billing document itemEach item in the billing document contains its owndata. This includes, for example, details about the material, billing quantities,and net values for the items. Each billing document can have several items.

To ensure that the billing documents are processed efficiently, the data can be readand processed in different views. The views are grouped into overview, headerand item screens.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 71

Page 80: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Figure 39: Effects of Billing Document

When you save the billing document, the system automatically generates allthe required documents for accounting. The system carries out a debit postingin accounting on the customer receivables account and a credit posting on therevenue account.

The accounting document identifies all the subsequent postings in financialaccounting that refer back to pricing in SD, such as the receivable on customeraccounts or the obtained net sales and taxes on the relevant G/L accounts.

When you save the billing document, the system can automatically generatefurther documents for Financial Accounting (for the Controlling components aswell as for profitability analysis, for example).

The following also occurs when you the billing document is posted:

� The status in all related sales, delivery, and billing documents is updated� The sales statistics in the sales information system are updated� The data regarding the consumption of the customer's credit limit is updated

72 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 81: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Document Flow

Figure 40: Document Flow in the System

The documents within a sales and distribution process are linked to each other viathe document flow. This enables you to access the history and current status ofyour sales and distribution processes at any time.

You can display the document flow as a list with the linked documents. Dependingon the document from which you call up the list, all the relevant preceding andsubsequent documents are displayed.

From this list, you can display the relevant documents or call up status overviewsfor the documents.

This provides a quick overview of the progress of your sales processes at any timeand can be used to answer customer questions quickly and reliably.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 73

Page 82: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Figure 41: Document Flow at Item Level

The document flow is updated at the document header and line item level.

Schedule lines are only in sales documents. Since each schedule line contains itsown delivery date, each deliverable schedule line becomes an individual item ina delivery document.

74 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 83: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Exercise 3: Sales and Distribution Process

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Create a simple sales order� Create an outbound delivery for a sales order� Execute picking and post the goods issue to an outbound delivery� Create a billing document for outbound delivery� Enter an incoming payment for the customer

Business ExampleAs a rule, the sales process begins with the customer ordering materials fromyou and telling you his requested delivery date. Using this information, you canenter a sales order.

You then trigger the shipping activities at the appropriate time so that the customerreceives the material in time. To be able to pick the material in stock, you generatea picking list. As soon as the material has left the company, you post the goodsissue in order to update stocks and values.

You then create a billing document and send the customer the invoice. As soonas the customer has paid for the materials, the incoming payments are posted inFinancial Accounting.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 75

Page 84: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Task 1:Describe the pre-sales activities.

1. In what part of the process do the pre-sales activities for sales and distributionprocessing take place?

2. What tasks are carried out during pre-sales activities?

Task 2:Create a sales order.

1. Create a standard order for the following customer purchase order.

Purchase order:

Customer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 4-211Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 10T-AS2## 20

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→Order→ Create.

Save the order and write down the document number.

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

76 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 85: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Task 3:Display the sales order and familiarize yourself with the screen layout.

1. Display the previously entered sales order. Write down the payment terms inthe sales order header.

____________________________________________

2. From which plant is item 10 delivered?

Hint: In order to display the plant for item 10, scroll to the right onthe Sales tab page.

____________________________________________

3. What is the net price for item 10 and item 20?

Hint: By scrolling to the right on the Sales tab page, you will findthe net price for an item.

____________________________________________

4. What is the delivery date in the schedule line for item 10?

Hint: In order to display the schedule lines for the item, choose item10 and then select Schedule lines for item.

____________________________________________

5. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?

Hint: To display the overall processing status, choose Displaydocument flow.

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 77

Page 86: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Task 4:Create the outbound delivery.

1. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order.

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shippingand Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ SingleDocument→ With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter theoutbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 daysinto the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

2. Switch to the Picking tab page and record the delivery quantity and pickingquantity for the two items.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

3. Save the delivery and record the document number.

____________________________________________

Task 5:Display the document flow for the delivery.

1. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?

Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the sales orderdocument flow. Choose Outbound Delivery -> Display and thenDocument Flow.

____________________________________________

2. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

78 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 87: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Task 6:Display the inventory management for materials.

1. Before the materials leave the plant and the goods issue is being posted,display the stocks for Material T-AS1## in plant 1000.

Hint: Open a new session in order to trace the stocks.

Inventory management is carried out in materials management.Choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

Record how many pieces are in stock and available for use.

____________________________________________

Task 7:Pick the outbound delivery.

1. Create a transfer order as a basis for goods movement in the warehouse andto print the picking list. Enter the transfer order for the outbound deliveryfrom the previous task:

Warehouse Number 010Plant 1000Foreground/Backgrnd BackgroundAdopt picking quantity 1

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping andTransportation→ Picking→ Create Transfer Order→ SingleDocument

Record the transfer order number.

____________________________________________

Task 8:Once picking has been carried out, you can post the goods issue.

1. Change the outbound delivery. First, note the picking quantities that are inboth items in the outbound delivery.

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 79

Page 88: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

____________________________________________

2. Post the goods issue.

Hint: In the Change Outbound Delivery transaction, choose PostGoods Issue.

Task 9:Display the inventory management for materials.

1. Once the materials have left the plant and the goods issue has been posted,display the stocks for Material T-AS1## in plant 1000 again.

Hint: Switch to your second session and choose Refresh. If youhave deleted the second session, choose Logistics→ MaterialsManagement→ Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

Record how many pieces are now still in stock.

____________________________________________

Task 10:Display the document flow for the delivery.

1. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?

Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the sales orderdocument flow. Choose Outbound Delivery -> Display and thenDocument Flow..

____________________________________________

2. What further documents have been entered for outbound delivery?

____________________________________________

3. Why is the status for the outbound delivery still being processed?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

4. Why are the transfer order and goods issue already completed?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________Continued on next page

80 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 89: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Task 11:Create the billing document.

1. Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task:

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→Billing Document→ Create

Save the billing document and write down the document number.

____________________________________________

Task 12:Display the billing document.

1. Check in the billing document header which company code the data has beenposted to in Financial Accounting.

Hint: The company code is in the billing document header underthe accounting data. Choose Billing Document→ Display and thenDisplay doc. header details.

____________________________________________

2. Display the accounting document for the billing document and write downwhich accounts have been posted to.

Hint: To display the accounting document, go to Display BillingDocument: Accounting overview and choose Accounting document.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

3. Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overallprocessing status for the outbound delivery?

____________________________________________

4. What further document has been generated by saving the billing document?

____________________________________________

5. What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?

____________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 81

Page 90: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Task 13:The customer pays the invoice. Enter the incoming payment from the customerfor financial accounting.

1. First, display the billing document to check the invoiced amount that thecustomer has to pay. The customer pays punctually and can, therefore,justifiably claim the deduction of cash discount. Record the final amount anddeduction of cash discount.

Hint: Display the billing document. Check the pricing conditionsin the billing document header.

Choose Billing Document→ Display.

Choose Pricing conditions header.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

2. Enter the incoming payments. The customer pays the final amount of theinvoice minus the deduction of cash discount.

The incoming payment is entered with:

Document date: Today�s dateCompany code: 1000Posting date: Today�s dateCurrency: EUR

Bank dataAccount: 100009Amount: See previous exercise: Total minus cash

discount

Continued on next page

82 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 91: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Open Item selection:Account: T-S50A##

Hint: In Financial Accounting, you enter incoming payments bychoosing: Accounting→ Financial Accounting→ Customers→Document Entry→ Incoming Payments.

Once you have entered the different values, choose Process openitems.

The posting can only be completed successfully when the valuesfrom both fields on the bottom right match: Amount Entered andAssigned.

If several open items are available, you can deactivate these bydouble clicking on the amount field.

3. Finally, display the document flow for the billing document again.

What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?

____________________________________________

Task 14:Questions about the overview of sales processes.

1. Which steps are carried out in sales and distribution processes?

2. Which function in the system can you use to display the overall processingstatus and history for documents?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 83

Page 92: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

3. What are the three levels of a sales order?

4. What are the two levels of an outbound delivery and a billing document?

5. What are the effects of posting a goods issue?

6. What are the effects of creating a billing document?

84 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 93: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Solution 3: Sales and Distribution ProcessTask 1:Describe the pre-sales activities.

1. In what part of the process do the pre-sales activities for sales and distributionprocessing take place?

Answer: Pre-sales activities such as inquiries and quotations usually comeat the start of the sales processes, before the customer sales orders areprocessed.Customer sales activities, for example visits or telephone calls, can also takeplace during the entire duration of the customer relationships, be enteredinto the system, and administered.

2. What tasks are carried out during pre-sales activities?

Answer: Pre-Sales activities include:

� Maintaining customer contacts� Mailing lists� Processing customer inquiries� Processing quotations.

Task 2:Create a sales order.

1. Create a standard order for the following customer purchase order.

Purchase order:

Customer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 4-211Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 10T-AS2## 20

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→Order→ Create.

Save the order and write down the document number.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 85

Page 94: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 3:Display the sales order and familiarize yourself with the screen layout.

1. Display the previously entered sales order. Write down the payment terms inthe sales order header.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Payment terms:

ZB01. The payment terms are on the Sales tab page.

2. From which plant is item 10 delivered?

Hint: In order to display the plant for item 10, scroll to the right onthe Sales tab page.

____________________________________________

a) From plant 1000.

For example, by scrolling to the right, you will find the delivery plantfor the item on the Procurement or the Sales tab page.

3. What is the net price for item 10 and item 20?

Hint: By scrolling to the right on the Sales tab page, you will findthe net price for an item.

____________________________________________

a) Net price item Item 10: 60 Euro per piece.

Net price item Item 20: 30 Euro per piece.

By scrolling to the right on the Sales tab page, you will find the netprice for an item.

Continued on next page

86 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 95: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

4. What is the delivery date in the schedule line for item 10?

Hint: In order to display the schedule lines for the item, choose item10 and then select Schedule lines for item.

____________________________________________

a) Delivery date: Corresponds to the requested delivery date in 10 days.

In order to display the schedule lines for the item, choose item 10 andthen select Schedule lines for item.

5. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?

Hint: To display the overall processing status, choose Displaydocument flow.

____________________________________________

a) Overall processing status: open

You will find the overall processing status in the sales order documentflow. Choose Display document flow.

Task 4:Create the outbound delivery.

1. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order.

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shippingand Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ SingleDocument→ With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter theoutbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 daysinto the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order.

To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set theselection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

2. Switch to the Picking tab page and record the delivery quantity and pickingquantity for the two items.

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 87

Page 96: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

____________________________________________

a) Select the Picking tab page.

Delivery qty Pick quantityItem 10 10 0Item 20 20 0

3. Save the delivery and record the document number.

____________________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 5:Display the document flow for the delivery.

1. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?

Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the sales orderdocument flow. Choose Outbound Delivery -> Display and thenDocument Flow.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Display

Choose Display document flow.

Standard order: Overall processing status: completed

2. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?

____________________________________________

a) Outbound delivery: Overall processing status: open

Continued on next page

88 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 97: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Task 6:Display the inventory management for materials.

1. Before the materials leave the plant and the goods issue is being posted,display the stocks for Material T-AS1## in plant 1000.

Hint: Open a new session in order to trace the stocks.

Inventory management is carried out in materials management.Choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

Record how many pieces are in stock and available for use.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

There are 100 pieces in stock in plant 1000.

Task 7:Pick the outbound delivery.

1. Create a transfer order as a basis for goods movement in the warehouse andto print the picking list. Enter the transfer order for the outbound deliveryfrom the previous task:

Warehouse Number 010Plant 1000Foreground/Backgrnd BackgroundAdopt picking quantity 1

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping andTransportation→ Picking→ Create Transfer Order→ SingleDocument

Record the transfer order number.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Picking→ Create Transfer Order→ Single Document

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 89

Page 98: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Task 8:Once picking has been carried out, you can post the goods issue.

1. Change the outbound delivery. First, note the picking quantities that are inboth items in the outbound delivery.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Change→ Single Document

Pick QuantityItem 10 10Item 20 20

2. Post the goods issue.

Hint: In the Change Outbound Delivery transaction, choose PostGoods Issue.

a) Choose Post Goods Issue.

Task 9:Display the inventory management for materials.

1. Once the materials have left the plant and the goods issue has been posted,display the stocks for Material T-AS1## in plant 1000 again.

Hint: Switch to your second session and choose Refresh. If youhave deleted the second session, choose Logistics→ MaterialsManagement→ Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

Record how many pieces are now still in stock.

____________________________________________

a) Switch to your second session and choose Refresh. There are 90 piecesin stock in plant 1000.

Continued on next page

90 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 99: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Task 10:Display the document flow for the delivery.

1. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?

Hint: You will find the overall processing status in the sales orderdocument flow. Choose Outbound Delivery -> Display and thenDocument Flow..

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Display

Choose Document Flow.

Outbound delivery: Overall processing status: in process

2. What further documents have been entered for outbound delivery?

____________________________________________

a) WM transfer order and goods delivery for outbound delivery.

3. Why is the status for the outbound delivery still being processed?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) The subsequent document billing document has not yet been enteredfor outbound delivery. The document maintains the status in processuntil shipping processing is completed by the creation of the billingdocument.

4. Why are the transfer order and goods issue already completed?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) The transfer order and goods issue are both part of the outbounddelivery. Both steps are completed.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 91

Page 100: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

Task 11:Create the billing document.

1. Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task:

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→Billing Document→ Create

Save the billing document and write down the document number.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 12:Display the billing document.

1. Check in the billing document header which company code the data has beenposted to in Financial Accounting.

Hint: The company code is in the billing document header underthe accounting data. Choose Billing Document→ Display and thenDisplay doc. header details.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Display

Choose Display doc. header details.

Company code 1000

2. Display the accounting document for the billing document and write downwhich accounts have been posted to.

Hint: To display the accounting document, go to Display BillingDocument: Accounting overview and choose Accounting document.

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

92 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 101: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

____________________________________________

a) Choose Accounting overview.

Select the accounting document.

The following accounts have been posted to:

Customer account Motomarket Heidelberg

Domestic sales revenue (per item)

Output tax

3. Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overallprocessing status for the outbound delivery?

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Display

Choose Display Document Flow.

Outbound delivery: Overall processing status: completed

4. What further document has been generated by saving the billing document?

____________________________________________

a) The accounting document is automatically generated in the backgroundwhen the billing document is created.

5. What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?

____________________________________________

a) Accounting document: Overall processing status: not cleared

Task 13:The customer pays the invoice. Enter the incoming payment from the customerfor financial accounting.

1. First, display the billing document to check the invoiced amount that thecustomer has to pay. The customer pays punctually and can, therefore,justifiably claim the deduction of cash discount. Record the final amount anddeduction of cash discount.

Hint: Display the billing document. Check the pricing conditionsin the billing document header.

Choose Billing Document→ Display.

Choose Pricing conditions header.Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 93

Page 102: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Final amount 1392 (corresponds to the total amount of the invoice)

Cash discount 41.76-

2. Enter the incoming payments. The customer pays the final amount of theinvoice minus the deduction of cash discount.

The incoming payment is entered with:

Document date: Today�s dateCompany code: 1000Posting date: Today�s dateCurrency: EUR

Bank dataAccount: 100009Amount: See previous exercise: Total minus cash

discount

Open Item selection:Account: T-S50A##

Hint: In Financial Accounting, you enter incoming payments bychoosing: Accounting→ Financial Accounting→ Customers→Document Entry→ Incoming Payments.

Once you have entered the different values, choose Process openitems.

The posting can only be completed successfully when the valuesfrom both fields on the bottom right match: Amount Entered andAssigned.

If several open items are available, you can deactivate these bydouble clicking on the amount field.

a) Amount due (final amount - cash discount): 1392 � 41.76 = 1350.24

Accounting→ Financial Accounting→ Customers→ Document Entry→ Incoming Payments

3. Finally, display the document flow for the billing document again.Continued on next page

94 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 103: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Display

Choose Display Document Flow.

Accounting document: Overall processing status: cleared

Task 14:Questions about the overview of sales processes.

1. Which steps are carried out in sales and distribution processes?

Answer: Presales ActivitiesSales Order ProcessingProcurementShippingBillingPayment

2. Which function in the system can you use to display the overall processingstatus and history for documents?

Answer: With the function Display document flow.

3. What are the three levels of a sales order?

Answer: Order headerItemSchedule line

4. What are the two levels of an outbound delivery and a billing document?

Answer: HeaderItem

5. What are the effects of posting a goods issue?

Answer: Stock quantity is updatedValues are updated in inventory accountingStocks are updatedFurther accounting documents are generated (in Controlling, for example)The billing index is updated (by doing so, the billing document can begenerated for outbound delivery)Status in all relevant sales documents is updated.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 95

Page 104: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 3: Overview of Sales Processes SCM600

6. What are the effects of creating a billing document?

Answer: Accounting document is created.Further documents are created for accountingStatus in all relevant sales documents is updated.The sales information system is updated.The customer credit management account is updated

96 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 105: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Billing Document Processing

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Invoice a customer for the delivery� Enter an incoming payment in the system

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 97

Page 106: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the process chain for sales order processing� Create a sales order with reference to a quotation� Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order� Pick and post goods issue� Invoice a customer for the delivery� Enter an incoming payment in the system

98 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 107: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4Master Data in Sales and Distribution

Unit OverviewThis unit covers the key sales and distribution-relevant master data.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Maintain customer master data� Maintain material master data� Maintain the customer-material info record� Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions� Issue output for sales documents� Work with the incompletion log

Unit ContentsLesson: Customer Master . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Exercise 4: Customer Master . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107Lesson: Material Master .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Lesson: Customer Material Info Record ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Exercise 5: Material Master and Customer-Material Info Record ... .129Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146Lesson: Additional Master Data.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Exercise 6: Additional Master Data .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 99

Page 108: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: Customer Master

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the structure and function of the customer master.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Maintain customer master data

Business Example� IDES, Inc. adds new customers to its existing customer base.

Customer Master

Figure 42: Data Origin in Sales Documents

Several sources of data can be copied into a sales order or into another sales anddistribution document. Most of them are default values that you can overwritein the sales and distribution document, if necessary.

100 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 109: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

These sources of data include, for example:

� Customer master data� Material master data� Condition master data

(You create and maintain this master data in the sales and distribution masterdata for automatic pricing. This could be a material price or a customerdiscount, for example).

� Output is information that is sent to the customer via various media, such asmail, EDI, or fax. Examples include the printout of a quotation or an orderconfirmation, order confirmations via EDI, or invoices by fax.

Control table: you can create and maintain these tables in Customizing. Thedefault values of several data can be controlled in the sales and distributiondocuments, depending on the table settings.

A previous sales document can serve as a source of data for another salesdocument. Example: a quotation can serve as a data source for a sales order.

Figure 43: Customer Master

The customer master groups data into categories: general data, sales area data,and company code data.

The general data is relevant for sales and distribution and for accounting. It isstored centrally (client-specific), in order to avoid data redundancy. It is valid forall organizational units within a client.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 101

Page 110: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

The sales area data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for therespective sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division).

The company code data is relevant for accounting. It is valid for the respectivecompany code.

The customer master includes all data necessary for processing orders, deliveries,invoices, and customer payments.

Figure 44: Data on the General Data Tab Pages

In order to maintain the general data in the customer master that is relevant forsales and distribution and accounting, the data fields are grouped on several tabpages.

The general data is maintained independently of the organizational units.

The general data in the customer master is set out on the following tab pages:

� Address� Control data� Payment transactions� Marketing� Unloading points� Export data� Contact persons

By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page ormake them required entry fields.

102 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 111: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Figure 45: Data on the Sales Area Data Tab Pages

You can maintain the sales area data in various ways, depending on the sales area(sales organization, distribution channel, division).

The sales area data in the customer master is set out on the following tab pages:

� Sales� Shipping� Billing document� Partner functions

By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page ormake them required entry fields.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 103

Page 112: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Figure 46: Partner Functions in the Customer Master

You store the partner functions for the customer master in the customer mastersales area data (tab page Partner functions). During sales order processing, theyare copied as default values into the documents.

For sales order processing, you need the mandatory partner functions sold-to party,ship-to party, payer, and bill-to party. In the course of processing a sales order,they can differ from each other or can be identical.

� Sold-to party: places the order.� Ship-to party: receives goods or services.� Bill-to party: receives the invoice for goods or services.� Payer: is responsible for paying the invoice.

Other partner functions, such as contact person or forwarding agent, are notabsolutely necessary for sales order processing.

104 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 113: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Figure 47: Data on the Company Code Data Tab Pages

In order to maintain the company code data relevant for accounting in the customermaster, the data fields are grouped on several tab pages.

You can maintain the company code data in various ways, according to thecompany code

The company code data in the customer master comprises the following tab pages:

� Account management� Payment transactions� Correspondence� Insurance

By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page ormake them required entry fields.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 105

Page 114: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Figure 48: Effects of Changes in the Customer Master

When you change a master record after having used it to create documents (orders,deliveries, billing documents, and so on), the changes do not affect the documentsalready created. The address in the customer master, however, is an exception. Ifnecessary, therefore, you would have to change the data (but not the address) inthe documents manually.

106 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 115: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Exercise 4: Customer Master

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain a customer master record� Understand the effect of customer master data on document processing in

sales and distribution� Issue output for sales and distribution documents on the screen

Business ExampleA new customer wants to place an order and intends to order more goods fromyou in the future. Therefore, you create a master record for the customer. Thecustomer informs you that they would like to have the goods delivered to variousaddresses. At a later point, the customer informs you of an address change. Youtherefore change the customer master. After processing the order for the newcustomer, you want to have a look at the layout of the order confirmation beforeprinting it out and sending it to the customer.

Task 1:Create a customer master record for the new customer.

1. You create the customer master with number 234## for sales area 1000,12, 00 and for company code 1000.

Hint: Since the relevant sales and accounting data is alreadyavailable, enter the customer master for the sold-to party. To doso, choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→Business Partner→ Customer→ Create→ Complete.

Enter only the data specified below.

During a telephone call with the customer, you note down the followinginformation.

Note:

Account group: 0001 Sold-to party (use the first entry for the sold-to partyin the search help table).

Customer: 234##

Address data:

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 107

Page 116: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Name: Miller

Search term: LO150-##

Street: Venus Street 12

Post code: 20111

City: Hamburg

Country: Germany

Transportation zone: Northern Region

Language: Language of the course

Control data:

VAT registration number: DE##1234567

Company code data:

Reconciliation account: 140000

Sales area data:

Sales:

Customer group: Retail company

Shipping:

Shipping conditions: ## Standard (corresponds to group number + 50)

Delivering plant: 1000 Hamburg

Billing document:

Incoterms EXW Hamburg

Terms of payment: Payable immediately without deductions

Tax classification: subject to tax

Save the customer master record.

Continued on next page

108 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 117: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Task 2:Display the previously created customer master record.

1. You are not sure whether you have used the Incoterms fields correctly. Howcan you get information in the system to make sure that you have usedthem correctly?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

Hint: Display the customer master. Use the field help with F1 forthe two fields on Incoterms. The fields can be found in the sales areadata on the Billing Document tab page.

2. In the customer master record, you have maintained a language forcommunication with your customer. Does this mean that the orderconfirmation for this customer will be printed using this language?

____________________________________________

Hint: On the Address tab page in the General data, use the fieldhelp (F1) in the language field.

3. In the sales area data, check which customer is the bill-to party on thePartner functions tab page.

____________________________________________

Task 3:Change the customer master record.

1. The customer informs you of another ship-to party to which the goods areto be delivered frequently besides the sold-to party. To facilitate orderprocessing, you store the additional ship-to party in the customer master ofthe sold-to party. A customer master record has already been created for theship-to party (T-S50B##).

Change the customer master record of the sold-party from the previousexercise. In the sales area data, create the additional ship-to party on thePartner functions tab page using number T-S50B##.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 109

Page 118: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 4:The new customer is placing an order for the first time.

1. Create a standard order for the new customer based on the purchase order.Use the F4 search help to find the sold-to party.

Purchase order

Customer: Search term: LO150-##Ship-to party: T-S50B##Purchase order number: 5-411Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS2## 2

2. In the sales order, the system proposes the Incoterms as they are maintainedin the customer master record. However, for this order, the Incoterms FOBHamburg should be valid. Change these entries in the order.

Hint: In the sales order, the Incoterms can be found in the orderheader on the Sales tab page.

Does the change affect the customer master record?

____________________________________________

3. Save the order and write down the order number.

____________________________________________

Task 5:Change the customer master record of the sold-to party.

1. The customer informs you of an address change. Enter the new street:Enjoystr. 99.

2. You have agreed on the new terms of payment ZB02 with the customer.Change these entries in the customer master as well.

Hint: In the customer master, the terms of payment can be found inthe sales area data on the Billing document tab page.

Continued on next page

110 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 119: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Task 6:Display the previously entered sales order (see above).

1. Check the address of the sold-to party in the sales order. Did it change afteryou changed the customer master?

____________________________________________

2. Check the terms of payment in the sales order. Did they change after youchanged the customer master?

____________________________________________

Task 7:Display the order confirmation on the screen.

1. Before printing and sending the order confirmation, you would like to checkthe layout of the order confirmation.

Hint: Display the sales order and choose Header output preview.

Task 8:Create the outbound delivery.

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order (see above). Check the ship-to party address inthe outbound delivery. Write down the customer number of the ship-to party.

____________________________________________

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shippingand Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ SingleDocument→ With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter theoutbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 daysinto the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Task 9:Display the previously entered customer master record for customer Miller.

1. How can you check in the system the sales areas for which the customerrecord has been maintained?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 111

Page 120: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

2. How can you check in the system when and by whom the customer masterwas created?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

3. How can you check in the system how, when, and by whom which fields inthe customer master were changed?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

4. How can you display a list of orders for the customer from the customermaster?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

Task 10:Questions on the Customer Master.

1. You have created the new customer master record for sales organization1000, distribution channel 12, and division 00 only. Sales organization 1020may possibly want to sell goods to the customer as well. What would youneed to do to make it possible for sales organization 1020 to enter salesorders for this customer?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

2. Sales organization 1020 also processes orders with the new customer. Salesorganization 1020 has agreed to other Incoterms with the customer than salesorganization 1000. Is it possible to maintain these different Incoterms fordifferent sales organizations in the customer master record?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

3. Is it possible in the customer master record to maintain various addressesfor the sold-to party in multiple company codes?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

112 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 121: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Solution 4: Customer MasterTask 1:Create a customer master record for the new customer.

1. You create the customer master with number 234## for sales area 1000,12, 00 and for company code 1000.

Hint: Since the relevant sales and accounting data is alreadyavailable, enter the customer master for the sold-to party. To doso, choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→Business Partner→ Customer→ Create→ Complete.

Enter only the data specified below.

During a telephone call with the customer, you note down the followinginformation.

Note:

Account group: 0001 Sold-to party (use the first entry for the sold-to partyin the search help table).

Customer: 234##

Address data:

Name: Miller

Search term: LO150-##

Street: Venus Street 12

Post code: 20111

City: Hamburg

Country: Germany

Transportation zone: Northern Region

Language: Language of the course

Control data:

VAT registration number: DE##1234567

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 113

Page 122: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Company code data:

Reconciliation account: 140000

Sales area data:

Sales:

Customer group: Retail company

Shipping:

Shipping conditions: ## Standard (corresponds to group number + 50)

Delivering plant: 1000 Hamburg

Billing document:

Incoterms EXW Hamburg

Terms of payment: Payable immediately without deductions

Tax classification: subject to tax

Save the customer master record.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Create→ Complete

Task 2:Display the previously created customer master record.

1. You are not sure whether you have used the Incoterms fields correctly. Howcan you get information in the system to make sure that you have usedthem correctly?

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

114 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 123: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

____________________________________________

Hint: Display the customer master. Use the field help with F1 forthe two fields on Incoterms. The fields can be found in the sales areadata on the Billing Document tab page.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Sales and Distribution , Billingdocument tab page.

Incoterms (part 1) define rules for shipping. Incoterms (part 2) containadditional information on the primary Incoterms.

2. In the customer master record, you have maintained a language forcommunication with your customer. Does this mean that the orderconfirmation for this customer will be printed using this language?

____________________________________________

Hint: On the Address tab page in the General data, use the fieldhelp (F1) in the language field.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Sales and Distribution , Addresstab page.

Yes. The language key designates, for example, the language that youuse to print documents.

3. In the sales area data, check which customer is the bill-to party on thePartner functions tab page.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Sales and Distribution , tab pagePartner Functions.

The bill-to party is the sold-to party. If necessary, you can store furtherpossible bill-to parties in the customer master record.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 115

Page 124: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 3:Change the customer master record.

1. The customer informs you of another ship-to party to which the goods areto be delivered frequently besides the sold-to party. To facilitate orderprocessing, you store the additional ship-to party in the customer master ofthe sold-to party. A customer master record has already been created for theship-to party (T-S50B##).

Change the customer master record of the sold-party from the previousexercise. In the sales area data, create the additional ship-to party on thePartner functions tab page using number T-S50B##.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Sales and Distribution , tab pagePartner Functions.

Task 4:The new customer is placing an order for the first time.

1. Create a standard order for the new customer based on the purchase order.Use the F4 search help to find the sold-to party.

Purchase order

Customer: Search term: LO150-##Ship-to party: T-S50B##Purchase order number: 5-411Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS2## 2

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

2. In the sales order, the system proposes the Incoterms as they are maintainedin the customer master record. However, for this order, the Incoterms FOBHamburg should be valid. Change these entries in the order.

Hint: In the sales order, the Incoterms can be found in the orderheader on the Sales tab page.

Does the change affect the customer master record?

Continued on next page

116 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 125: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

____________________________________________

a) No. The data is proposed from the customer master in the order andcan be overwritten, if necessary.

3. Save the order and write down the order number.

____________________________________________

a) The system assigns the order document number.

Task 5:Change the customer master record of the sold-to party.

1. The customer informs you of an address change. Enter the new street:Enjoystr. 99.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Change→ Sales and Distribution underGeneral Data, Address tab page.

2. You have agreed on the new terms of payment ZB02 with the customer.Change these entries in the customer master as well.

Hint: In the customer master, the terms of payment can be found inthe sales area data on the Billing document tab page.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Change→ Sales and Distribution, Billingdocument tab page.

Task 6:Display the previously entered sales order (see above).

1. Check the address of the sold-to party in the sales order. Did it change afteryou changed the customer master?

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Choose Display doc. header details.

Choose the Partners tab page.

When the address in the customer master is changed, it is also changedin the order.

2. Check the terms of payment in the sales order. Did they change after youchanged the customer master?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 117

Page 126: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Choose the Sales tab page.

The terms of payment have not changed. The new terms of paymentin the customer master only become effective when you create newsales orders. If required, you would have to change them manually inthe sales order that has already been entered. The only exception tothis is the address. If it is changed, it becomes immediately effectivein sales orders that already exist.

Task 7:Display the order confirmation on the screen.

1. Before printing and sending the order confirmation, you would like to checkthe layout of the order confirmation.

Hint: Display the sales order and choose Header output preview.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Choose Header output preview. (The layout of an output can bechanged using the SAPScript functions.)

Task 8:Create the outbound delivery.

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order (see above). Check the ship-to party address inthe outbound delivery. Write down the customer number of the ship-to party.

____________________________________________

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shippingand Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ SingleDocument→ With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter theoutbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 daysinto the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

Ship-to party: T-S50B##

Continued on next page

118 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 127: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Task 9:Display the previously entered customer master record for customer Miller.

1. How can you check in the system the sales areas for which the customerrecord has been maintained?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Complete

Choose Customer's sales areas.

2. How can you check in the system when and by whom the customer masterwas created?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Complete

Extras→ Administrative Data

3. How can you check in the system how, when, and by whom which fields inthe customer master were changed?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Complete

Environment→ Account Changes→ All Fields

Position the cursor on the relevant line and click Choose.

4. How can you display a list of orders for the customer from the customermaster?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Complete

Environment→ List Documents→ Orders

Choose Enter.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 119

Page 128: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 10:Questions on the Customer Master.

1. You have created the new customer master record for sales organization1000, distribution channel 12, and division 00 only. Sales organization 1020may possibly want to sell goods to the customer as well. What would youneed to do to make it possible for sales organization 1020 to enter salesorders for this customer?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) You would also have to create the sales area data for this customer forthe relevant sales area with sales organization 1020.

2. Sales organization 1020 also processes orders with the new customer. Salesorganization 1020 has agreed to other Incoterms with the customer than salesorganization 1000. Is it possible to maintain these different Incoterms fordifferent sales organizations in the customer master record?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) Yes. You can maintain the Incoterms in the customer master recordin various ways, depending on the sales area (sales organization,distribution channel, division).

3. Is it possible in the customer master record to maintain various addressesfor the sold-to party in multiple company codes?

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

a) No. The address of the sold-to party is maintained independently ofthe organizational units. (It is possible to assign several ship-to partiesto a sold-to party).

120 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 129: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Master

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain customer master data

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 121

Page 130: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: Material Master

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the structure and function of the material master.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Maintain material master data

Business Example� IDES, Inc. is offering a new material that is also to be mapped in the system

as a master record.

Material Master

Figure 49: Material Master

The material master comprises the following areas: basic data, sales anddistribution data, purchasing data, various further data for engineering/design,accounting, costing, warehouse management, and so on.

The basic data is relevant for all areas. It is valid for all organizational units withina client.

122 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 131: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Material Master

The sales organization data is relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid for therespective sales organization and the distribution channel.

The sales: plant data is also relevant for sales and distribution. It is valid forthe respective delivering plant.

Additional data relevant for different organizational units is available for variousother areas.

Figure 50: Data on the Sales Tab Pages

There are several tab pages in the material master, that are valid for sales anddistribution:

� The basic data is relevant for all areas. It is maintained independently of theorganizational units.

� The data for Sales: Sales Org. 1 and Sales: Sales Org. 2 as well as the salestext is valid for the sales organization and the distribution channel.

� The Sales: General/Plant data and the Foreign Trade: Export data is valid forthe delivering plant.

By changing the Customizing settings, you can hide certain fields on a tab page ormake them required entry fields.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 123

Page 132: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Division-Specific and Cross-Division Sales

Figure 51: Cross-Division Sales

You can use this kind of processing to enter multiple materials with variousdivisions in a sales order.

You can control the following in Customizing, according to the sales documenttype:

� Whether it is possible to enter multiple materials with various divisionsfor an order.

� The way the system is to respond (with or without warning message)� Whether the division on item level is copied from the material master record

or whether the division in the document header is also copied into the item.

124 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 133: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Material Master

Figure 52: Division-Specific Sales

You cannot use this kind of processing to enter multiple materials with variousdivisions in an order.

This can be controlled in Customizing, according to the sales document type.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 125

Page 134: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain material master data

126 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 135: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the structure and function of the customer-material inforecord.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Maintain the customer-material info record

Business Example� IDES, Inc. wants to store material-specific data for a customer.

Customer Material Info Record

Figure 53: Master Data: Customer-Material Information

The customer-material info record is used for storing customer-specific materialdata.

If a customer-material info record has been defined for a customer and a material,the default values take priority over the values in the customer or material masterwhen a document is processed (order, delivery, and so on).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 127

Page 136: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

You can use the customer-material information record to maintain the followingdata:

� Cross-reference from your customer's material number to your materialnumber and the customer's material description.

� Specific shipping information for this customer and material (such asdelivery tolerances, specifying if the customer will accept partial deliveries,or the default delivering plant).

Figure 54: Order Entry using the Customer-Material Information

Sales orders can be placed with the customer's material number by using theOrdering Party tab page.

The system finds the associated material master via the customer-materialinformation.

128 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 137: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Exercise 5: Material Master andCustomer-Material Info Record

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain a customer master record� Maintain customer-material information� Understand the effects of material master data and customer-material info on

the processing of documents in sales and distribution

Business ExampleYou have added a new material to your product range. You wish to post goodsreceipts to the stock for this material, and create sales orders.

Some major customers usually order materials using their own material numbers.In order to facilitate sales order processing, you use the customer-materialinformation.

Task 1:Create a material master record for the new material.

1. The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T-AS1##.In order to facilitate the entry of the material master record, you can usethe relevant reference data.

You enter the material master for plant 1000, sales organization 1000, anddistribution channel 12. Use these organizational units too when referencingthe reference material.

Hint: Since the material is 'trading goods' that are purchased by thevendor and resold to the customer, use the following transaction tomaintain the material master: Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→Master Data→ Products→ Material→ Trading Goods→ Create.

You have the following information on the new headlight:

(Apart from this information, the material has the same features as thesystem proposed for the reference material T-AS1##.)

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 129

Page 138: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Industry: Retail

Reference material: T-AS1##

Hint: You first maintain the views Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org.Data 1, Sales: General/Plant Data, Sales Text, and Accounting 1based on the existing information.

Material description: Headlight 'simple'

Weight: not yet known

Caution: The gross and net weight of the new material are not yetknown. Since you create the material master record with reference tomaterial T-AS1##, the system proposes the weight. Do not forget todelete these proposals on the Basic Data 1 tab page. Maintain theweight entries for the material later, once you have access to them.

Tax classification: Full tax

Minimum order quantity: 10

Minimum delivery quantity: 5

Price: as of 1 piece: 20 EUR per piece

Hint: You can maintain the material price directly when creatingthe material master record by choosing Conditions on the Sales:Sales Org. 1 tab page

Loading group: Crane

Sales text: �Material is fragile!�

Accounting data:

Price control: V

Moving average price: 10

Save the material master record and write down the number.

____________________________________________

Continued on next page

130 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 139: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Task 2:Enter goods receipt.

1. You are informed that for the new headlight 200 pieces have already beendelivered. Enter the goods receipt for this amount.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management.Choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ Other

Enter the goods receipt using movement type 561 in plant 1000, storagelocation 0001.

Save the goods receipt. Document number: _____________

Task 3:You receive the first sales order for the new material.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order

Customer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 5-1311Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityHeadlight Simple 10(from the previous exercise)

2. Save the order and write down the order number.

_____________________________________

Hint: Save the order although it is not yet complete. The weightfor the material is still missing. You have to complete it once youhave the data.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 131

Page 140: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 4:Create the outbound delivery.

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order.

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shippingand Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ SingleDocument→ With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter theoutbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 daysinto the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Why is it not possible to create the outbound delivery?

_______________________________________________________________

Task 5:Change the material master record.

1. In the meantime, you have received the details on the weight of the newheadlight. Change the material master record and enter the weight.

Gross weight: 1 KG

Net weight: 1 KG

Hint: You can enter the weight on the Basic Data 1 tab page.

Task 6:Change the incomplete order.

1. Were there any changes in the previously entered sales order containing thenew headlight after you changed the weight in the material master record?

_________________________________________________________

2. You need to enter the weight in the incomplete order in order to carry out theshipping activities afterwards. Change the incomplete standard order andenter the weight for the item containing the headlight.

Continued on next page

132 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 141: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Gross weight: 10 KG

Net weight: 10 KG

Hint: You can find the fields for the gross and the net weight in theitem detail on the Shipping tab page.

Task 7:Try to create the outbound delivery again .

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

2. Check whether the material sales text, which is maintained in the materialmaster record, also appears in the delivery item.

Hint: You can find the texts for the delivery item in the item detailon the Texts tab page.

Task 8:Create a customer-material info record.

1. One of your major customers orders materials using his own materialnumbers. To facilitate order entry, you create a customer-material info forsales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12.

For the new material (headlight �Simple�), customer T-S50A## usescustomer material number K-4711-## and the description Headlight 4711.

You have also agreed with the customer on a minimum delivery quantity of10 pieces for this material.

Hint: You can find the transaction for creating a customer-materialinfo by choosing Agreements from the Master Data menu.

Task 9:Create a sales order using a customer material number.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 133

Page 142: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Purchase order

Customer: T-S50A##Purchase ordernumber:

5-1911

Requested deliverydate:

in 10 days

Item Our material number Quantity1 K-4711-## 10

2. Save the order and write down the order number.

_____________________________________

Task 10:Create the outbound delivery.

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

____________________________________________

2. To check how the customer material number will be printed on the deliverynote, you display the delivery note on the screen.

Hint: To display the delivery note, choose Outbound Delivery→Design and then Outbound Delivery→ Issue Delivery Output.

Choose Print Preview.

Task 11:Questions on the material master.

1. You want to sell your materials through several sales organizations. Is itpossible to maintain multiple sales units in the material master according tothe sales organization and the distribution channel?

__________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

134 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 143: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

2. You want to deliver your materials from various plants. Is it possible tomaintain multiple loading groups in the material master according to theplant?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

3. Is it possible to maintain multiple minimum order quantities in the materialmaster according to the division?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

4. You enter your sales orders with the header division 00.You know that thisdivision is set for cross-division sales in Customizing. Would it be possibleto enter several items in a sales order with multiple materials that belongto various divisions?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 135

Page 144: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Solution 5: Material Master andCustomer-Material Info RecordTask 1:Create a material master record for the new material.

1. The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T-AS1##.In order to facilitate the entry of the material master record, you can usethe relevant reference data.

You enter the material master for plant 1000, sales organization 1000, anddistribution channel 12. Use these organizational units too when referencingthe reference material.

Hint: Since the material is 'trading goods' that are purchased by thevendor and resold to the customer, use the following transaction tomaintain the material master: Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→Master Data→ Products→ Material→ Trading Goods→ Create.

You have the following information on the new headlight:

(Apart from this information, the material has the same features as thesystem proposed for the reference material T-AS1##.)

Industry: Retail

Reference material: T-AS1##

Hint: You first maintain the views Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org.Data 1, Sales: General/Plant Data, Sales Text, and Accounting 1based on the existing information.

Material description: Headlight 'simple'

Weight: not yet known

Caution: The gross and net weight of the new material are not yetknown. Since you create the material master record with reference tomaterial T-AS1##, the system proposes the weight. Do not forget todelete these proposals on the Basic Data 1 tab page. Maintain theweight entries for the material later, once you have access to them.

Continued on next page

136 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 145: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Tax classification: Full tax

Minimum order quantity: 10

Minimum delivery quantity: 5

Price: as of 1 piece: 20 EUR per piece

Hint: You can maintain the material price directly when creatingthe material master record by choosing Conditions on the Sales:Sales Org. 1 tab page

Loading group: Crane

Sales text: �Material is fragile!�

Accounting data:

Price control: V

Moving average price: 10

Save the material master record and write down the number.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Products→Material→ Trading Goods→ Create

The material number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 2:Enter goods receipt.

1. You are informed that for the new headlight 200 pieces have already beendelivered. Enter the goods receipt for this amount.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management.Choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ Other

Enter the goods receipt using movement type 561 in plant 1000, storagelocation 0001.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 137

Page 146: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Save the goods receipt. Document number: _____________

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ Other

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 3:You receive the first sales order for the new material.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order

Customer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 5-1311Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityHeadlight Simple 10(from the previous exercise)

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

2. Save the order and write down the order number.

_____________________________________

Hint: Save the order although it is not yet complete. The weightfor the material is still missing. You have to complete it once youhave the data.

a) Save your entries, although the document is still incomplete. Thedocument number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

138 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 147: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Task 4:Create the outbound delivery.

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order.

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shippingand Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ SingleDocument→ With Reference to Sales Order. To be able to enter theoutbound delivery at an earlier date, set the selection date 20 daysinto the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Why is it not possible to create the outbound delivery?

_______________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

You cannot create the outbound delivery because the order to bedelivered is still incomplete due to the missing entries for weight.

Task 5:Change the material master record.

1. In the meantime, you have received the details on the weight of the newheadlight. Change the material master record and enter the weight.

Gross weight: 1 KG

Net weight: 1 KG

Hint: You can enter the weight on the Basic Data 1 tab page.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Products→Material→ Trading Goods→ Change

You can maintain the weight on the Basic Data 1 or on the Sales:General/Plant Data tab page. (The weight data is independent of theorganizational units.)

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 139

Page 148: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 6:Change the incomplete order.

1. Were there any changes in the previously entered sales order containing thenew headlight after you changed the weight in the material master record?

_________________________________________________________

a) When the material master record is modified, there will be no changesto the sales order that has already been entered in the system. Thechanges in the material master record only become effective in ordersthat are entered afterwards

2. You need to enter the weight in the incomplete order in order to carry out theshipping activities afterwards. Change the incomplete standard order andenter the weight for the item containing the headlight.

Gross weight: 10 KG

Net weight: 10 KG

Hint: You can find the fields for the gross and the net weight in theitem detail on the Shipping tab page.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Change

Choose Display item details and the Shipping tab page.

Task 7:Try to create the outbound delivery again .

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

The outbound delivery can be created because the order to be deliveredis now complete .

Continued on next page

140 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 149: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

2. Check whether the material sales text, which is maintained in the materialmaster record, also appears in the delivery item.

Hint: You can find the texts for the delivery item in the item detailon the Texts tab page.

a) Choose Display item details and the Texts tab page .

First of all, the text was copied from the material master into the salesorder. Then it was copied from the sales order into the outbounddelivery.

Task 8:Create a customer-material info record.

1. One of your major customers orders materials using his own materialnumbers. To facilitate order entry, you create a customer-material info forsales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12.

For the new material (headlight �Simple�), customer T-S50A## usescustomer material number K-4711-## and the description Headlight 4711.

You have also agreed with the customer on a minimum delivery quantity of10 pieces for this material.

Hint: You can find the transaction for creating a customer-materialinfo by choosing Agreements from the Master Data menu.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Agreements→ Customer Material Information→ Create

To enter the customer material description and the minimum deliveryquantity, choose Info record details.

Task 9:Create a sales order using a customer material number.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order

Customer: T-S50A##Purchase ordernumber:

5-1911

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 141

Page 150: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Requested deliverydate:

in 10 days

Item Our material number Quantity1 K-4711-## 10

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

To enter the item using the customer material number, choose theOrdering party tab page.

2. Save the order and write down the order number.

_____________________________________

a) The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 10:Create the outbound delivery.

1. The sales order should already be delivered. Create an outbound delivery forthe previous standard order.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

____________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

142 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 151: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

2. To check how the customer material number will be printed on the deliverynote, you display the delivery note on the screen.

Hint: To display the delivery note, choose Outbound Delivery→Design and then Outbound Delivery→ Issue Delivery Output.

Choose Print Preview.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Display→ Outbound Delivery→ IssueDelivery Output

Choose Print Preview.

The customer material number is automatically printed on the deliverynote. (The layout of an output can be changed using the SAPScriptfunctions.)

Task 11:Questions on the material master.

1. You want to sell your materials through several sales organizations. Is itpossible to maintain multiple sales units in the material master according tothe sales organization and the distribution channel?

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. In the material master, there are various ways to maintain multiplefields, such as the sales units, depending on the sales organizationand on the distribution channel.

2. You want to deliver your materials from various plants. Is it possible tomaintain multiple loading groups in the material master according to theplant?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. In the material master, there are various ways to maintain multiplefields, such as the loading group, depending on the plant.

3. Is it possible to maintain multiple minimum order quantities in the materialmaster according to the division?

__________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 143

Page 152: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

__________________________________________________________

a) No. The division in the material master is not an organizational unitthat can be used to maintain related fields. It is a field which is used touniquely assign a material to a division.

4. You enter your sales orders with the header division 00.You know that thisdivision is set for cross-division sales in Customizing. Would it be possibleto enter several items in a sales order with multiple materials that belongto various divisions?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. In Customizing, you can configure the system for cross-divisionor division-specific sales. You can enter multiple materials with variousdivisions in a sales order, depending on these settings.

144 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 153: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Customer Material Info Record

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain the customer-material info record

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 145

Page 154: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the condition master data.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions

Business Example� You define a price for the new material, which will be valid for all customers.� For certain major customers, you define special prices and discounts.

Condition master data

Figure 55: Condition Master

The condition master data includes prices, surcharges and discounts, freights,and taxes.

You can define condition master data (condition records) to be dependent onvarious data. You can, for example, maintain a material price customer-specificallyor define a discount to be dependent on the customer and the material pricinggroup.

146 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 155: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing

In Customizing, you can control the data on which prices, surcharges anddiscounts, freights or taxes can be dependent. (You can define conditions to bedependent on any document fields). Frequently occurring cases have alreadybeen set in the standard system.

Figure 56: Condition Master Records in Pricing

The condition type defines multiple uses of a condition.

You can have a percentage, a quantity-dependent, or an amount-dependentsurcharge or discount, depending on the condition type .

By specifying a validity period, you can restrict a price agreement to a certainperiod.

You can maintain values within a condition record (price, surcharge, discount)according to a scale. There is no limit to the number of scale levels.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 147

Page 156: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Figure 57: Pricing in Sales Orders

Prices, surcharges, discounts, freight, and taxes (conditions) for a businesstransaction can be found automatically using the automatic pricing function. Youcan also change these conditions manually.

Pricing is carried out using the condition technique.

148 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 157: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Condition Master Data for Pricing

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 149

Page 158: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Lesson: Additional Master Data

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces other important aspects of master data.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Issue output for sales documents� Work with the incompletion log

Business Example� IDES, Inc. uses the incompletion log to check the sales documents.� The customers of IDES, Inc. receive output from the system (order

confirmations, for example) for the individual process steps.

Output

Figure 58: Output

Output is information that is sent to the customer via various media, such asmail, EDI, or fax. Examples include: the printout of a quotation or an orderconfirmation, order confirmations via EDI, or invoices by fax.

150 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 159: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

As with pricing, output determination takes place using the condition technique.

Output can be sent for various sales and distribution documents (order, delivery,billing document, ...).

In the output master data, you define the transmission medium, the time, andthe partner function for an output type.

Output types include quotations, order confirmations, and invoices.

Partner functions include sold-to parties, ship-to parties, and bill-to parties.

Transmission media include printers, telex, fax, mail, and EDI.

Output can be sent, for example, as soon as data is saved or by means of a standardprogram that is run regularly (RSNAST00).

The layout of an output is defined by a form in SAPscript. The form is assignedto an output type.

Incompleteness Check

Figure 59: Incompletion log

Each sales and distribution document contains data required for the document andfor further processing.

The system determines which fields will be displayed in the incompletion log, ifthe user does not complete them during sales order processing.

You receive the incompletion log either:

a) Automatically when the data is saved, or

b) By choosing Edit→ Incompletion Log.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 151

Page 160: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

In Customizing, you can decide which fields should be part of the incompletionlog.

The incompletion log functions are available in the sales order and in the delivery.

Common Master Data

Figure 60: Common Master Data - Distribution Channels

If you do not need the master data (customer / material and condition masterdata) to be differentiated according to distribution channels, you have to set upa representative distribution channel. The master data for the representativedistribution channel applies to all distribution channels for which you have set upthis reference in Customizing.

By doing this, you can minimize the effort of entering and maintaining master data.

In addition, you can update statistics for distribution channels without having tocreate master data for the various distribution channels.

152 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 161: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

Figure 61: Common Master Data - Divisions

If you do not need the master data (customer or condition master data) to bedifferentiated according to divisions, you have to set up a representative division.The master data in the representative division applies to all divisions for whichyou have set up this reference in Customizing.

By doing this, you can minimize the effort of entering and maintaining master data.

In addition, you can update statistics for divisions without having to create masterdata for the various divisions.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 153

Page 162: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

154 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 163: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

Exercise 6: Additional Master Data

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Maintain condition master data� Describe the pricing in a sales order

Business ExampleYou have defined certain price agreements for some major customers. As thesecustomers place orders frequently, they should have lower prices for somematerials, depending on the quantity ordered. In addition, a customer should begranted a percentage discount, depending on the order value.

As it is not necessary to enter these agreements each time you create an order, youwant to use the automatic pricing function of the system and create the appropriatecondition master data.

Task 1:Create a condition master record for prices.

1. You have agreed with customer T-S50A## that, from now on, they are toreceive material T-AS1## at a quantity-dependent lower price.

As of 1 piece: 29 EUR per 1 piece

As of 10 pieces: 28 EUR per 1 piece

As of 100 pieces: 27 EUR per 1 piece.

These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter thecondition master record for the customer-specific price for sales organization1000 and distribution channel 12.

Hint: As it is a customer-specific price, you create the conditionmaster record using the following menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Conditions→ Select Using Condition Type→ Create

Condition type PR00

Key combination Customer/material with release status

Choose Scales.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 155

Page 164: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 2:After saving the price agreement with the major customer in the system, youreceive another order.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 5-2311Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 20

2. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing functionhas determined the correct prices.

Hint: In order to trace the pricing in the sales order, choose Itemconditions.

Which price per piece was determined by the system?

_______________________________________

3. Save the order and write down the order number.

______________________________________

Task 3:Create a condition master record for discounts.

1. You have agreed with customer T-S50A## that, from now on, they are to begranted a percentage discount for all materials, depending on the item value.

As of 100 EUR: -1%

As of 500 EUR: -2%

As of 1000 EUR: -3%

Continued on next page

156 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 165: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter thecondition master record for the customer-specific discount for salesorganization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00.

Hint: Since this is a customer-specific percentage discount, createthe condition master record by choosing:

Master Data→ Conditions→ Select Using Condition Type→Create

Condition type K007

Task 4:After storing the price agreement for the discount for the major customer in thesystem, you receive another order.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 5-2511Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 10

2. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing functionhas determined the correct prices and discounts.

Hint: To track the pricing in the sales order, you have to branch tothe Conditions tab page for the Item detail.

Which customer discount was determined by the system?

_______________________________________

3. Save the order and write down the order number.

______________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 157

Page 166: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Task 5:Questions on condition master data in pricing.

1. Which condition master data categories (4) can be used in pricing?

2. You want to sell your materials through multiple distribution channels. Isit possible to maintain the prices in the condition master in different waysaccording to the distribution channel?

3. You have entered a sales order. By doing so, prices were determined bythe automatic pricing function. Can you change the prices manually whenentering the order?

4. During sales order processing, you use various divisions. However, youalways want to use the same condition master data for all divisions. In orderto avoid unnecessary maintenance of condition master data for multipledivisions, you would like to configure the system in such a way, that thecondition master data of division 00 are also valid for division 01. Is thispossible?

Continued on next page

158 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 167: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

5. Is it possible to make these settings for common master data for customerand material master data as well?

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 159

Page 168: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

Solution 6: Additional Master DataTask 1:Create a condition master record for prices.

1. You have agreed with customer T-S50A## that, from now on, they are toreceive material T-AS1## at a quantity-dependent lower price.

As of 1 piece: 29 EUR per 1 piece

As of 10 pieces: 28 EUR per 1 piece

As of 100 pieces: 27 EUR per 1 piece.

These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter thecondition master record for the customer-specific price for sales organization1000 and distribution channel 12.

Hint: As it is a customer-specific price, you create the conditionmaster record using the following menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Conditions→ Select Using Condition Type→ Create

Condition type PR00

Key combination Customer/material with release status

Choose Scales.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Conditions→Select Using Condition Type→ Create

Condition type PR00

Key combination Customer/material with release status

Enter sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, customerT-S50A##, and material T-AS1##.

Choose Scales.

Enter Validity Today until End of the year.

Enter the values from the exercise.

Choose Save.

Continued on next page

160 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 169: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

Task 2:After saving the price agreement with the major customer in the system, youreceive another order.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 5-2311Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 20

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

2. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing functionhas determined the correct prices.

Hint: In order to trace the pricing in the sales order, choose Itemconditions.

Which price per piece was determined by the system?

_______________________________________

a) Choose Item conditions.

The system has determined a price of 28 EUR per piece, as in the pricecondition record from 10 pieces a price of 28 EUR per piece is stored.

3. Save the order and write down the order number.

______________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 3:Create a condition master record for discounts.

1. You have agreed with customer T-S50A## that, from now on, they are to begranted a percentage discount for all materials, depending on the item value.

As of 100 EUR: -1%

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 161

Page 170: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

As of 500 EUR: -2%

As of 1000 EUR: -3%

These agreements should be valid until the end of the year. Enter thecondition master record for the customer-specific discount for salesorganization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00.

Hint: Since this is a customer-specific percentage discount, createthe condition master record by choosing:

Master Data→ Conditions→ Select Using Condition Type→Create

Condition type K007

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Conditions→Select Using Condition Type→ Create

Condition type K007

Enter sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00,and customer T-S50A##.

Choose Scales.

Enter Validity Today until End of the year.

Enter the values from the exercise.

Choose Save.

Task 4:After storing the price agreement for the discount for the major customer in thesystem, you receive another order.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 5-2511Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 10

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ CreateContinued on next page

162 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 171: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

2. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing functionhas determined the correct prices and discounts.

Hint: To track the pricing in the sales order, you have to branch tothe Conditions tab page for the Item detail.

Which customer discount was determined by the system?

_______________________________________

a) Choose Display item details.

Choose the Conditions tab page.

The system has determined the customer discount K007 (-1%), becausea discount of -1% is stored in the discount condition record for ordersover 100 EUR.

3. Save the order and write down the order number.

______________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 5:Questions on condition master data in pricing.

1. Which condition master data categories (4) can be used in pricing?

Answer: Prices, surcharges/discounts, freights, taxes.

2. You want to sell your materials through multiple distribution channels. Isit possible to maintain the prices in the condition master in different waysaccording to the distribution channel?

Answer: Yes. Usually, the price is maintained according to the salesorganization and the distribution channel. The price can also be maintainedaccording to further criteria (the customer, for example).

3. You have entered a sales order. By doing so, prices were determined bythe automatic pricing function. Can you change the prices manually whenentering the order?

Answer: Yes. Usually, during order entry you can overwrite the pricemanually . However, it is possible to restrict this by making the relevantsettings in Customizing or in the condition record.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 163

Page 172: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 4: Master Data in Sales and Distribution SCM600

4. During sales order processing, you use various divisions. However, youalways want to use the same condition master data for all divisions. In orderto avoid unnecessary maintenance of condition master data for multipledivisions, you would like to configure the system in such a way, that thecondition master data of division 00 are also valid for division 01. Is thispossible?

Answer: Yes. In Customizing, you can set up division 00 as a representativedivision and reference from divisions 01 and 02 to it. In this way, thecondition master data of division 00 is also valid for divisions 01 and 02.

5. Is it possible to make these settings for common master data for customerand material master data as well?

Answer: For customer master data, it is possible to configure commonmaster data for the divisions. For material master data, this is only possiblefor distribution channels, as the division in the material master is not anorganizational unit that can be used to maintain related fields.

164 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 173: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Additional Master Data

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Issue output for sales documents� Work with the incompletion log

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 165

Page 174: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Maintain customer master data� Maintain material master data� Maintain the customer-material info record� Maintain condition master data and explain pricing functions� Issue output for sales documents� Work with the incompletion log

166 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 175: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5Sales and Distribution Processes �Data Determination and Collective

Processing

Unit OverviewThis unit explains, among other things, the function of the sales document type insales and distribution processes and delivery scheduling. Collective processingoptions within sales and distribution processes are another important topic.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types� Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined

automatically� Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system

and be able to look at scheduling in detail� Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound delivery

in one step� Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

Unit ContentsLesson: Function of the Sales Document Type... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171Lesson: Shipment Scheduling ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Exercise 7: Shipment Scheduling ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Exercise 8: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution... . . . . . . .205

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 167

Page 176: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Lesson: Function of the Sales Document Type

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the function of sales document types in sales processes.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types

Business Example� IDES, Inc. uses a variety of sales document types to control sales processes.

Function of the Sales Document Type

Figure 62: Sales Document Types

In Sales, a wide range of different activities are carried out. Different businessprocesses can be identified and controlled by means of the sales document type.

The standard system features a wide range of different sales document types forsales processes that are carried out on a regular basis:

� Standard order for invoiced sales on fixed delivery dates.� Rush order and cash sales for sales from the plant (with or without invoice).� Free deliveries for sales on fixed delivery dates (without invoice).� Returns for return goods (credit memo/replacement delivery).

You can implement these processes as they are or use them as a basis for mappingyour own processes.

168 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 177: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Sales Document Type

The sales document type controls the sales documents. Similarly, the deliverytype can be used to control the shipping documents and the billing type can beused to control the billing documents.

Figure 63: Functions of Sales Documents

Depending on the transaction, certain functions are carried out automatically.These functions can be activated or deactivated directly via the sales documenttype.

Examples:

� For your standard sales process, you want the system to automaticallydetermine the time at which your customer can receive the ordered goods.To do so, activate the shipment scheduling and availability check functions.These functions, however, are not required for credit memo requests.

� Pricing does not need to be carried out for free deliveries.� Define an output group that can be used for processing sales orders and then

create another output group for processing contracts.

Hint: Outputs contain information that is exchanged between businesspartners (order confirmations, billing forms, electronic message to oneof your colleagues, for example).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 169

Page 178: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types

170 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 179: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination

Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains how to carry out plant, shipping point, and routedetermination in sales documents.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determinedautomatically

Business Example� The content of the Plant, Shipping Point, and Route fields in a sales document

can be determined automatically and acts as a basis for delivery scheduling.

Plant Determination

Figure 64: Determining the Delivering Plant Automatically

The plant plays a central role in Logistics. In Sales, it is the delivering plant.

When processing an item, the system automatically attempts to determine theassociated delivering plant from the master data. The entry can later be changedmanually.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 171

Page 180: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

The system uses the following search strategy:

� First, it checks whether a specification exists in a customer-material inforecord.

� Second, it checks whether a specification exists in a customer master recordof the ship-to party.

� Third, it checks whether a specification exists in the material master record.

If nothing is found, no delivering plant is set in the sales document item.

Without a plant, an item cannot normally be processed further. For example,attempts to automatically determine the shipping point or tax are unsuccessful, theavailability cannot be checked, and an outbound delivery cannot be made.

Shipping Point Determination

Figure 65: Shipping Point

The shipping point is the organizational unit in the system that is responsiblefor processing shipping.

To name a delivery date for an ordered customer, the system must take intoaccount all the required lead times for the different shipping and transportationsub-processes.

For the shipping point, you can define the times required for preparing andpacking the goods.

172 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 181: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination

The shipping point is normally determined automatically for each item in the salesdocument. The automatic default value can be later changed manually if you haveplanned for a different shipping point.

Figure 66: Route

The route is the path a delivery follows from the delivering plant to the ship-toparty.

It can comprise more than one section. It has a start point and an end point.

The route can be used to define the actual transit time (length of time for whichthe goods are 'on the road') and the lead time for transportation planning.

The route is normally determined automatically for each item in the salesdocument. This default value can be later changed manually if you have planneda different route.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 173

Page 182: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Figure 67: Determining the Shipping Point Automatically

The system tries to determine a shipping point for every item to be delivered.

The system uses three fields as search keys for determining the shipping pointautomatically. This data is normally defined in the following master records:

� Shipping condition from the sold-to party (view: Shipping)� Loading group in the sales-specific material data (view: Sales: General/Plant

Data)� Delivering plant - see the slide Determining Delivering Plant Automatically

Hint: The shipping conditions can be used to define in the system thedelivery type requested by the customer.

174 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 183: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Plant, Shipping Point, and Route Determination

Route Determination

Figure 68: Determining the Route Automatically

The system tries to determine a route for every item to be delivered.

The system uses four fields as search keys for determining the route automatically.This data is normally defined in master records and in Customizing:

� The departure zone in Customizing for the shipping point� Shipping condition from the sold-to party (view: Shipping)� Transportation group in the sales-specific material data (view: Sales:

General/Plant Data)� Transportation zone in the general data for the ship-to party

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 175

Page 184: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined

automatically

176 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 185: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the shipment scheduling process.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the systemand be able to look at scheduling in detail

Business Example� Customers order goods with different delivery dates.

Shipment Scheduling

Figure 69: Shipment Scheduling

In shipment and transportation scheduling, you define the time at which the receiptof the goods at the customer can be acknowledged (confirmed delivery date).Different lead times are taken into account: the preparation time, loading time,transportation lead time, and transit time.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 177

Page 186: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

The following data is used in shipment scheduling:

� Order date: date on which the order is placed� Material availability date: date by which a sufficient quantity of goods must

be available for picking and packing� Loading date: date on which the goods picking and packing process is

completed (and the mode of transport is available) so that loading can beginon time

� Goods issue date: the date on which the goods must leave the deliveringplant so that they reach the customer on the agreed date

� Delivery date: date on which the goods arrive at the customer. Adifferentiation is made between:

� Requested delivery date: date on which the customer would like thegoods to arrive

� Confirmed delivery date: date on which the goods receipt is confirmedfor the customer.

Figure 70: Shipment Scheduling

When a delivery date is determined, you can also take into account the timesrequired for delivering goods to a customer via a particular route.

178 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 187: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

The total time includes:

� The transit time:

The time required for transporting the goods to the customer

� Transportation lead time:

The time required for preparing the goods for transportation

Figure 71: Backward Scheduling

The goal of shipment and transportation scheduling is to confirm a delivery datefor a material requested by a customer.

For backwards scheduling, the customer's requested delivery date is used tocalculate the material availability date and the transportation lead time. Thedelivery must be created on the earliest of the two dates (selection date foroutbound delivery).

� If both dates are after the order date and the material is available on thematerial availability date, the customer's requested delivery date can beconfirmed.

A schedule line is created for the sales document item. The date of theschedule line displays the confirmed delivery date that is the same as thecustomer's requested delivery date.

� If one of the two dates is before the order date, confirmation of the requesteddelivery date cannot take place. Therefore, the system attempts to determinethe next possible date (forward scheduling).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 179

Page 188: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Figure 72: Forward Scheduling

If the result of backward scheduling means that the delivery date required by thecustomer cannot be confirmed, the system executes forward scheduling.

� Forward scheduling takes into consideration the time parallels of the workflows for transportation planning and picking/packing of materials. Thelonger of the two periods is relevant for scheduling. The selection dateof the outbound delivery is the earlier of the material availability or thetransportation planning date.

� The earliest date at which the material is available in the warehouse is thenew material availability date. This is the outgoing point for new deliveryscheduling.

Two schedule lines are generated for the sales line item:

� The date of the first schedule line corresponds to the customer's requireddelivery date and has no confirmed quantity.

� The date of the second schedule line shows the confirmed delivery dateand the confirmed amount.

180 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 189: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Exercise 7: Shipment Scheduling

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Start the different sales and distribution processes by choosing the

appropriate sales document type� Find important information for inventory sourcing and the outbound delivery

in the sales documents and identify the sources of this data� Provide your customers with detailed information from the sales documents,

for example, on the shipping and transportation scheduling dates.

Business ExampleA company has a range of sales and distribution processes. Before every sale, oneof your employees decides which sales and distribution process will best servethe customer�s needs.

When a customer orders a material, there are a range of decisions to be made forthe whole sales and distribution processing chain. This includes obtaining relevantinformation on inventory sourcing and the outbound delivery, such as the plantfrom which the goods will be delivered or the location responsible for shippingprocessing.

In order entry, the customer service representative determines whether the materialis to be delivered from stock or whether the material must first be manufacturedor procured from a vendor. It is important to consider whether the material isdelivered from stock or whether it must be manufactured or procured from anexternal source.

IDES, Inc. tries to meet most of its sales orders using existing stock. If possible,orders are combined into one outbound delivery to reduce freight costs.

If the required delivery date cannot be confirmed, the customer is offered the firstpossible delivery date.

As a member of the project team for sales order processing, it is your responsibilityto test the sales and inventory sourcing processes in the system. You will enterorders and verify the shipping point for the product, the transportation route to thecustomer, and the scheduling dates for the items in the sales orders.

Task 1:Create a sales order.

1. Enter a trade fair order for the following purchase order. Use documenttype Trade fair##-order.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 181

Page 190: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50B##Purchase order number: 6-111Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 7T-AS2## 8

Hint: Use the F4 help in the order type field.

Save the order and write down the document number.

_______________________________________________

Continued on next page

182 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 191: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Task 2:Name other sales document types.

1. Name a sales document type used for sales from the plant.

2. Name a sales document type used for sending free-of-charge goods samples.

Task 3:By choosing the sales document type, you are choosing the basic requirementsof the sales and distribution process.

1. Name sales document functions that may be affected by the choice of salesdocument type.

Task 4:Identify the important information from the sales order that is used in the outbounddelivery.

1. Display the previously entered sales order. Which delivering plants havebeen specified for the two items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________

2. Which shipping points have been specified for the two items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 183

Page 192: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

3. Which routes have been specified for the two items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________

Hint: In the sales document, you can view (or change) the deliveringplant, the shipping point and the route from the Shipping tab page forthe corresponding document item.

You can use the black arrows on the application toolbar to navigateeasily between the Shipping tabs of the two items.

4. What is the purpose of the shipping point?

5. What is the purpose of the route?

Hint: You can use the F1 help to get information on the tasks andthe use of the shipping point and the route.

Continued on next page

184 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 193: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Task 5:The system tries to determine the delivering plant automatically for an itemin the sales document.

1. The system checks three sources in which the delivering plant can bespecified. What are these sources?

2. Which delivering plant is set for the item, if there is no entry in these sources?

3. From which master record does the delivering plant in item 10 come?

Task 6:The system tries to determine the shipping point responsible for executing theshipping activities of an item in the sales document.

1. The system uses three types of information from the sales order fordetermining the shipping point. What are they?

2. What values are used for automatically determining the shipping point foritem 10?

________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 185

Page 194: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

________________________________________________

________________________________________________

Hint: The shipping conditions come from the customer masterrecord of the sold-to party. It can be viewed or changed in the salesdocument header by choosing Display doc. header details thenchoosing the Shipping tab page.

The loading group comes from the material master record. It can bechecked and maintained on the detail screen Sales: General/Plant.The loading group is not displayed in the sales document.

Task 7:Explain on what dates the individual work stages for shipping and transportationprocessing should begin, so that the product ordered gets to the customer on time.

1. Enter a standard order for the following purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 6-411Requested deliverydate:

Today

Material Quantity Ship-to partyT-AS1## 5 T-S50A##T-AS3## 1 T-S50B##

To change the ship-to partner on a line item, select Goto -> Item -> Partner.Type the new ship-to party number over the existing one. The system willthen re-determine critical fields automatically.

Save the order and write down the document number.

_______________________________________________

2. Display the previously entered sales order.

Determine the shipping dates for item 10.

Delivery date: _________________________________

Goods issue date: _________________________________

Loading date: _________________________________Continued on next page

186 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 195: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Material availability date: _________________________________

Transportation planning date: _________________________________

Hint: You can display a detailed list of the shipping dates for theconfirmed schedule line of a sales document item.

Call up the schedule line for the item and go to the detail forconfirmed schedule line. Then choose the Shipping tab page.

3. When must the responsible shipping point start shipping processing so thatthe goods arrive at the customer�s location on time?

4. Which of the steps for shipping and transportation processing must becompleted so that the goods can be loaded on the correct loading date?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Hint: You can use the F1 help to get information on the tasks and theuse of the different dates in delivery and transportation scheduling.

Task 8:Create an outbound delivery for the first item in the above order.

1. Select the shipping point responsible. Use today�s date as the selection date.Restrict the selection to the first item in the sales document. Can you deliverthe order? Why?

2. If you could not create a delivery in the previous step, make the sameselection again but use the material availability date as a selection date. Canyou deliver the order item this time? Why?

____________________________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 187

Page 196: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

____________________________________________________________

Do NOT save the outbound delivery.

Hint: If you have accidentally saved the outbound delivery, deletethe delivery document with the menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Change→ Single Document→ OutboundDelivery→ Delete

188 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 197: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Solution 7: Shipment SchedulingTask 1:Create a sales order.

1. Enter a trade fair order for the following purchase order. Use documenttype Trade fair##-order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50B##Purchase order number: 6-111Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS1## 7T-AS2## 8

Hint: Use the F4 help in the order type field.

Save the order and write down the document number.

_______________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 2:Name other sales document types.

1. Name a sales document type used for sales from the plant.

Answer: Rush order, cash sale

2. Name a sales document type used for sending free-of-charge goods samples.

Answer: Free of charge delivery document is an example of an order typeused to send free samples.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 189

Page 198: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Task 3:By choosing the sales document type, you are choosing the basic requirementsof the sales and distribution process.

1. Name sales document functions that may be affected by the choice of salesdocument type.

Answer: Pricing, delivery scheduling, transfer of requirements, availabilitycheck, texts, output, credit check, update in Sales Information System aresome functions influenced by the document type

Task 4:Identify the important information from the sales order that is used in the outbounddelivery.

1. Display the previously entered sales order. Which delivering plants havebeen specified for the two items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________

a) Item 10: 1000

Item 20: 1000

2. Which shipping points have been specified for the two items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________

a) Item 10: Z0##

Item 20: Z0##

3. Which routes have been specified for the two items?

Item 10: ___________________________________________

Item 20: ___________________________________________

Hint: In the sales document, you can view (or change) the deliveringplant, the shipping point and the route from the Shipping tab page forthe corresponding document item.

You can use the black arrows on the application toolbar to navigateeasily between the Shipping tabs of the two items.

a) Item 10: R00030

Item 20: R00030Continued on next page

190 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 199: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

4. What is the purpose of the shipping point?

Answer: Place the cursor on the field and choose F1. The shipping point isthe organizational unit, whose employees are responsible for the completeshipping processing.

5. What is the purpose of the route?

Hint: You can use the F1 help to get information on the tasks andthe use of the shipping point and the route.

a) The route establishes the path and the method of transportation adelivery item takes to reach the customer location. The route is also animportant criteria for the selection of orders for shipping worklists.

Task 5:The system tries to determine the delivering plant automatically for an itemin the sales document.

1. The system checks three sources in which the delivering plant can bespecified. What are these sources?

Answer: The master record in the customer-material info record, the masterrecord of the ship-to party, and the material master record.

2. Which delivering plant is set for the item, if there is no entry in these sources?

Answer: No delivering plantException: if a default value is entered manually in the Delivering plant fieldin the header of the sales document, a default value will be proposed foreach line item.

3. From which master record does the delivering plant in item 10 come?

Answer: Ship-to party master record determines the plant.

Task 6:The system tries to determine the shipping point responsible for executing theshipping activities of an item in the sales document.

1. The system uses three types of information from the sales order fordetermining the shipping point. What are they?

Answer: Delivering plant, shipping conditions, loading group

2. What values are used for automatically determining the shipping point foritem 10?

________________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 191

Page 200: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

________________________________________________

________________________________________________

Hint: The shipping conditions come from the customer masterrecord of the sold-to party. It can be viewed or changed in the salesdocument header by choosing Display doc. header details thenchoosing the Shipping tab page.

The loading group comes from the material master record. It can bechecked and maintained on the detail screen Sales: General/Plant.The loading group is not displayed in the sales document.

a) Delivering plant 1000, shipping conditions ##+50 (70 for group 20,for example), and loading group 0003.

Task 7:Explain on what dates the individual work stages for shipping and transportationprocessing should begin, so that the product ordered gets to the customer on time.

1. Enter a standard order for the following purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 6-411Requested deliverydate:

Today

Material Quantity Ship-to partyT-AS1## 5 T-S50A##T-AS3## 1 T-S50B##

To change the ship-to partner on a line item, select Goto -> Item -> Partner.Type the new ship-to party number over the existing one. The system willthen re-determine critical fields automatically.

Save the order and write down the document number.

Continued on next page

192 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 201: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

_______________________________________________

a) Creating an Order

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

2. Display the previously entered sales order.

Determine the shipping dates for item 10.

Delivery date: _________________________________

Goods issue date: _________________________________

Loading date: _________________________________

Material availability date: _________________________________

Transportation planning date: _________________________________

Hint: You can display a detailed list of the shipping dates for theconfirmed schedule line of a sales document item.

Call up the schedule line for the item and go to the detail forconfirmed schedule line. Then choose the Shipping tab page.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order � Change→Select item 10→ Schedule lines for item→ Shipping

3. When must the responsible shipping point start shipping processing so thatthe goods arrive at the customer�s location on time?

Answer: On the material availability date

4. Which of the steps for shipping and transportation processing must becompleted so that the goods can be loaded on the correct loading date?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Hint: You can use the F1 help to get information on the tasks and theuse of the different dates in delivery and transportation scheduling.

a) Preparation (picking and packing) and transportation planning must becompleted so that loading can begin on time.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 193

Page 202: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Task 8:Create an outbound delivery for the first item in the above order.

1. Select the shipping point responsible. Use today�s date as the selection date.Restrict the selection to the first item in the sales document. Can you deliverthe order? Why?

Answer: No. If you cannot create delivery, it means that scheduling in theorder had the result that shipping processing must begin in several days andnot today. If you can create a delivery, the material availability date is today.

2. If you could not create a delivery in the previous step, make the sameselection again but use the material availability date as a selection date. Canyou deliver the order item this time? Why?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Do NOT save the outbound delivery.

Hint: If you have accidentally saved the outbound delivery, deletethe delivery document with the menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Change→ Single Document→ OutboundDelivery→ Delete

a) Yes. You must begin shipping processing on the material availabilitydate, so that the goods arrive at the customer�s location on theconfirmed delivery date that was determined during delivery andtransportation scheduling.

194 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 203: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Shipment Scheduling

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system

and be able to look at scheduling in detail

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 195

Page 204: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces the collective processing options in sales and distribution.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound deliveryin one step

� Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

Business Example� To reduce the number of documents, IDES, Inc. wants to create different

documents for collective processing.

Delivery Creation

Figure 73: Collective Processing in Shipping

196 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 205: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

To make shipping faster and easier, you can use the delivery due list to createmore than one outbound delivery simultaneously. The system automaticallycombines the items in the selected sales orders to minimize the number ofoutbound deliveries. This function can be used as follows:

� Online processing of the delivery due list� Creating a background job to be executed during off-peak hours

The system controls the creation of outbound deliveries via the shipping point, theselection data (picking date) and other criteria grouped on various tab pages. Bydefining this criteria, you can control which orders due for delivery are selected.The selection options change depending on the delivery scenario and user role.

You receive a list of the orders that meet your selection criteria. In this list, youcan make your selection more precise using sorting and filtering.

From the list, you can create outbound deliveries online or in the background andcall up the documents.

Hint: In collective processing, you can use the selection date to defineup to which date items due for delivery are taken into account. Shippingprocessing must begin on this date at the latest so that the goods reach thecustomer at the agreed time, which is either the material availability dateor the transportation planning date.

Figure 74: Outbound Delivery Options

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 197

Page 206: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

There are fields in master data and in the sales document where you can storecustomer defaults for processing deliveries.

� If the customer requires complete delivery, the order should be delivered inone single delivery. All items should be delivered at the same time. Whencreating an outbound delivery, if all of the order items cannot be shippedwith the full order quantity, you receive a warning that the customer requirescomplete delivery.

� If the customer does not require complete delivery, you can define a partialdelivery agreement with the customer.

� If the customer allows orders to be combined, the R/3 System combinesorders when creating the Delivery Due List. Combining items from differentsales orders is only possible if the items have several common characteristics,for example:

� Shipping point (goods issue from the same place in your enterprise)� Date that delivery is due (date on which shipping processing should

begin, either materials availability date or transportation planning date)must be within the selection dates on the delivery list initial screen.

� Ship-to party (outbound deliveries have the same destination)� Route (same method of transport and route)� Incoterms (�International Chamber of Commerce� terms of liability

for freight in-transit)

Picking

Figure 75: Picking in Shipping Processing

198 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 207: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

You can control an item in an outbound delivery in such a way that picking isrequired.

Picking is carried out when transfer orders for triggering and monitoring stockmovements are generated. The items in the transfer orders contain the materialsand quantities to be picked, which correspond to the delivery quantities. At thesame time, the delivery quantities are used as pick quantities in the outbounddelivery.

From the transfer order, you can print the pick list for use in the warehouse.

Picking can be confirmed automatically or in a separate processing step.

Figure 76: Collective Processing in Picking

You can also introduce picking via collective processing. To do this, you selecta worklist from all the outbound deliveries ready for picking and create severaltransfer orders at the same time. The system automatically combines the outbounddelivery items into as few transfer orders as possible.

Collective processing can be executed as follows:

� manually (online)� Creating a background job (batch) to be executed during off-peak hours

The system controls the creation of transfer orders via the shipping point, theselection data (picking date) and other criteria. You receive a list of the deliveriesthat meet your selection criteria. In this list, you can make your selection moreprecise using sorting and filtering.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 199

Page 208: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Figure 77: Picking Options

From the transfer order, you can print the picking list(s) for use in the warehouse.This step can be carried out automatically.

Instead of printing the picking list, you can also forward the transfer order data toan external Warehouse Management System by means of portable data capture(PDC).

If automatic confirmation is not used, you can also monitor picking byacknowledging the picked quantities manually. You can also confirm variances inquantities and specify the cause of these by setting a difference indicator.

If the total quantity cannot be picked, you can:

� Pick the open quantities by means of another transfer order� Reduce the delivery quantities in the outbound delivery by coping the picked

quantities

200 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 209: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Goods Issue

Figure 78: Collective Processing for Posting Goods Issue

The goods issue can also be posted via collective processing. To do so, selecta work list from all the outbound deliveries for which goods issue is ready tobe posted and simultaneously post more than one goods issue. The systemautomatically combines the outbound delivery items to create as few documents aspossible.

Collective processing can be executed as follows:

� manually (online)� Creating a background job (batch) to be executed during off-peak hours

The system controls the posting of the goods issue via the shipping point, theselection date, and other criteria (forwarding agent or route, for example). Youreceive a list of the deliveries that meet your selection criteria. If necessary, thelist can be drilled down to item level. In this list, you can make your selectionmore precise using sorting and filtering.

Once you have made your selection, post the goods issue.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 201

Page 210: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Billing

Figure 79: Collective Processing in Billing

To speed up the process of creating billing documents, you can use the billingdue list to process more than one billing document simultaneously. The systemcombines items for billing to create as few billing documents as possible.

This function can be used as follows:

� Manual processing of the billing due list (online processing)� Collective processing via a background job (batch) at off-peak hours

202 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 211: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Figure 80: Billing Options

When processing the billing due list, the system consolidates as many items aspossible onto as few billing documents as possible. Depending on the systemsetting, these can either be order items or outbound delivery items.

To be able to combine successfully, items must have specific commoncharacteristics, for example, the same billing date, the same payer and terms ofpayment. The list of common characteristics is maintained in Customizing.

The system contains a range of options for creating billing documents. You canchoose the option that best suits your requirements. Here are a few of the mostcommon options:

� Invoice split:

You have a sales order for which one outbound delivery has been processed.Two billing documents are created from the outbound delivery, based on keydifferences between the line items, for example, different material groups.

� Separate billing document for each outbound delivery:

You have a sales order for which two outbound deliveries have beenprocessed. Two billing documents are created from the outbound delivery.You would choose this option if your customers typically verify the invoiceagainst a bill of loading, for example.

� Collective invoice:

You have two sales orders for which three outbound deliveries have beenprocessed (for example, different ship-to party or partial delivery). A singlebilling document is created from the outbound deliveries.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 203

Page 212: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Figure 81: Worklists

This slide gives an overview of the options that are available for collectiveprocessing to support the sales and distribution process.

1. The delivery list is used to process many sales documents for outbounddeliveries.

2. The picking worklist creates transfer orders for picking.3. The goods issue worklist for outbound deliveries will post goods issue for

many deliveries.

Transactions which require picking are only taken into consideration in thislist after picking has been successfully carried out.

4. The billing due list is used to create invoices for outbound deliveries andorders.

Outbound deliveries are only taken into consideration in the billing due list ifthe goods issue has already been successfully carried out.

204 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 213: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Exercise 8: Collective Processing in Salesand Distribution

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Use worklists to identify documents ready for subsequent processing and to

process selected documents collectively� Combine orders for one customer� Create and print picking lists� Update stock quantities and stock accounts after the outbound delivery is

fully processed� Create collective or individual invoices� Identify receivables and revenues based on billing documents and post to the

corresponding accounts in financial accounting

Business ExampleAlthough you enter orders one at a time, work packages can be created thatallow you to collectively execute shipping and billing activities for many ordersat the same time.

It is more important to have efficient sales and distribution processing so that forthese steps in the process, work packages can be combined and processed together.

These work packages often have the same criteria, enabling these steps to beautomated and to be executed at specific times by the system.

The following activities are frequently a part of the further steps in sales orderprocessing: creating delivery notes, picking, shipping goods to the customer,creating invoices and posting receivables and revenues in financial accounting.

As a project team member, you will test the options for processing these workpackages.

Task 1:Process the delivery due list for your shipping point.

1. Select from the sales orders due for shipping, the ones which meet thefollowing criteria:

Shipping point: Z0##

Delivery creation date: From start of this week to today in four weeks

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 205

Page 214: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Ship-to party: T-S50A## and T-S50B##

Hint: Choose:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Collective Processing ofDocuments Due for Delivery→ Sales Orders

2. Which of the sales documents has been selected as part of the worklist?

Hint: The list of transactions for shipping will consist of ordersthat you have created in this unit, and potentially orders from theprevious unit (if you completed all of the optional exercises).

3. Why does the last order that you created appear in the list twice?

4. Via which routes will the outbound deliveries be shipped?

_____________ _____________

5. Select only those lines which come from the two orders you created in theprevious exercises for this unit.

Trigger processing of the selected worklist in the background.

Hint: Choose Background.

6. Display the collective processing log. Record the group number under whichthe system log is managed.

Group number: ________________________________________

Hint: Choose Log for delivery creation.

7. How many outbound deliveries have been created?

Number of outbound deliveries: _____________________________

8. Determine the document numbers of the outbound deliveries.

Continued on next page

206 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 215: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

_____________ _____________ _____________

Hint: Choose Documents.

Task 2:Pick the deliveries you have just created using collective processing.

1. Select from the outbound deliveries for picking, all of those which meetthe following criteria:

Shipping point: Z0##

Pick.date: from From start of this week to today in four weeks

Route: see delivery list exercise

Hint: Choose:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Picking→ Create Transfer Order→Via Outbound DeliveryMonitor

Hint: Alternatively, you can enter the group number that has beendefined by the system for the collective processing log for thisdelivery list.

2. Select from the list those deliveries that were created during processing ofthe delivery list.

Pick these outbound deliveries without branching into the transfer orders andallow the system to write the picked quantities into the outbound deliverydocuments automatically.

Adopt picking quantity: 1 (include picking quantities in the delivery)

Hint: Choose Create TO in background.

3. Check the outbound delivery and determine whether picking has been carriedout successfully.

Compare the delivery quantities with the picked quantities in one of youroutbound deliveries. Is there a difference between the quantities?

____________________________________________________________

4. Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 207

Page 216: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Overall picking status: ___________________________

Overall status of WM activities: ___________________________

Overall status of goods issue: ___________________________

Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose

→ Goto→ Header→ Processing

Task 3:Post goods issue for your outbound deliveries using collective processing.

1. Select from the outbound deliveries ready to post, all of those which meetthe following criteria:

Shipping point: Z0##

Planned goods movement date: from From start of this week to today infour weeks

Route: R00025 and R00030

Hint: Choose:

Logistics→Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Post Goods Issue→ Collective Processing Via Outbound DeliveryMonitor

2. Select from the list those deliveries that were created during processing ofthe delivery list.

Post the goods issue.

3. View an outbound delivery and determine whether goods issue posting hasbeen carried out successfully.

Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.

Overall status of goods issue: _________________________________

Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose→ Goto→ Header→ Processing.

Continued on next page

208 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 217: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Task 4:Process your billing due list.

1. Select from the outbound deliveries due for billing, the ones which meetthe following criteria:

Billing date: from start of this week to today in four weeks

Sales organization: 1000

Shipping point: Z0##

Sold-to party: T-S50A## and T-S50B##

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→Billing Document→ Process Billing Due List.

2. Select from the list those deliveries that were created during processing ofthe delivery list.

Test to see what the result of processing the billing due list would be.

Hint: Choose Simulation.

3. Compare two documents to see why the items from these outbound deliveriescannot be put together into one billing document.

Hint: Select two documents and choose Split analysis.

4. Return to the billing due list and create the billing documents using collectiveprocessing.

5. Record the log number for collective processing.

Group number: _________________________________________

6. Review the log to see how many billing documents have been created.

Number: ______________________________________

Record the billing document numbers:

_____________ _____________ _____________

7. Display one of the billing documents created, to see whether the salesprocess could be completed as requested. Use the document flow for thebilling document.

Is the sales process completed?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 209

Page 218: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

____________________________________________________________

Why?

____________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________

Task 5:Issue an invoice on the screen.

1. Review the invoice printout to determine whether the delivery conditionsand payment conditions are correct on the form.

Choose output type RD00 and printer LP01.

210 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 219: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Solution 8: Collective Processing in Salesand DistributionTask 1:Process the delivery due list for your shipping point.

1. Select from the sales orders due for shipping, the ones which meet thefollowing criteria:

Shipping point: Z0##

Delivery creation date: From start of this week to today in four weeks

Ship-to party: T-S50A## and T-S50B##

Hint: Choose:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Collective Processing ofDocuments Due for Delivery→ Sales Orders

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Collective Processing of DocumentsDue for Delivery→ Sales Orders

2. Which of the sales documents has been selected as part of the worklist?

Hint: The list of transactions for shipping will consist of ordersthat you have created in this unit, and potentially orders from theprevious unit (if you completed all of the optional exercises).

a) All orders due for delivery that match the selection criteria: these arethe two orders you have created in this course.

3. Why does the last order that you created appear in the list twice?

Answer: As they have different ship-to parties (and routes), the two items inthe order must be processed further using two separate outbound deliveries.

4. Via which routes will the outbound deliveries be shipped?

_____________ _____________

a) R00025 and R00030

5. Select only those lines which come from the two orders you created in theprevious exercises for this unit.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 211

Page 220: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Trigger processing of the selected worklist in the background.

Hint: Choose Background.

a) Select the relevant lines and choose Background.

6. Display the collective processing log. Record the group number under whichthe system log is managed.

Group number: ________________________________________

Hint: Choose Log for delivery creation.

a) The group number is displayed in the log. Choose Log for deliverycreation.

7. How many outbound deliveries have been created?

Number of outbound deliveries: _____________________________

a) Three outbound deliveries have been created.

8. Determine the document numbers of the outbound deliveries.

_____________ _____________ _____________

Hint: Choose Documents.

a) Choose Documents and record the document numbers.

Task 2:Pick the deliveries you have just created using collective processing.

1. Select from the outbound deliveries for picking, all of those which meetthe following criteria:

Shipping point: Z0##

Pick.date: from From start of this week to today in four weeks

Continued on next page

212 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 221: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Route: see delivery list exercise

Hint: Choose:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Picking→ Create Transfer Order→Via Outbound DeliveryMonitor

Hint: Alternatively, you can enter the group number that has beendefined by the system for the collective processing log for thisdelivery list.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Picking→ Create Transfer Order→Via Outbound Delivery Monitor

Routes: R00025 and R00030

2. Select from the list those deliveries that were created during processing ofthe delivery list.

Pick these outbound deliveries without branching into the transfer orders andallow the system to write the picked quantities into the outbound deliverydocuments automatically.

Adopt picking quantity: 1 (include picking quantities in the delivery)

Hint: Choose Create TO in background.

a) Choose Create TO in background.

3. Check the outbound delivery and determine whether picking has been carriedout successfully.

Compare the delivery quantities with the picked quantities in one of youroutbound deliveries. Is there a difference between the quantities?

____________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Outbound Delivery→ Display→ Picking

4. Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.

Overall picking status: ___________________________

Overall status of WM activities: ___________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 213

Page 222: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Overall status of goods issue: ___________________________

Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose

→ Goto→ Header→ Processing

a) Overall picking status: C fully picked

Overall status of WM activities: CWM trnsf order confirmed

Overall status of goods issue: A not yet started

Task 3:Post goods issue for your outbound deliveries using collective processing.

1. Select from the outbound deliveries ready to post, all of those which meetthe following criteria:

Shipping point: Z0##

Planned goods movement date: from From start of this week to today infour weeks

Route: R00025 and R00030

Hint: Choose:

Logistics→Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Post Goods Issue→ Collective Processing Via Outbound DeliveryMonitor

a) Logistics→Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ Post Goods Issue→ Collective Processing Via Outbound DeliveryMonitor

2. Select from the list those deliveries that were created during processing ofthe delivery list.

Post the goods issue.

a) Select the relevant outbound deliveries and choose Post goods issue.

3. View an outbound delivery and determine whether goods issue posting hasbeen carried out successfully.

Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.

Continued on next page

214 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 223: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

Overall status of goods issue: _________________________________

Hint: Display the outbound delivery and choose→ Goto→ Header→ Processing.

a) Overall status of goods issue: C completed

Task 4:Process your billing due list.

1. Select from the outbound deliveries due for billing, the ones which meetthe following criteria:

Billing date: from start of this week to today in four weeks

Sales organization: 1000

Shipping point: Z0##

Sold-to party: T-S50A## and T-S50B##

Hint: Choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→Billing Document→ Process Billing Due List.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→Process Billing Due List

2. Select from the list those deliveries that were created during processing ofthe delivery list.

Test to see what the result of processing the billing due list would be.

Hint: Choose Simulation.

a) Choose Simulation.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 215

Page 224: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

3. Compare two documents to see why the items from these outbound deliveriescannot be put together into one billing document.

Hint: Select two documents and choose Split analysis.

a) Select two documents and choose Split analysis. The followingdocument information are examples of fields that can affect a billingsplit:

� Sold-to party and payer� Reference and assignment number� Sales tax � identification number� Incoterms parts 1 and 2

4. Return to the billing due list and create the billing documents using collectiveprocessing.

a) Go back to the Process billing due list screen and choose Save.

5. Record the log number for collective processing.

Group number: _________________________________________

a) Record the group number from the log.

6. Review the log to see how many billing documents have been created.

Number: ______________________________________

Record the billing document numbers:

_____________ _____________ _____________

a) Three billing documents have been created. Choose Documents.

7. Display one of the billing documents created, to see whether the salesprocess could be completed as requested. Use the document flow for thebilling document.

Is the sales process completed?

____________________________________________________________

Why?

____________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

216 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 225: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution

____________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Display

Choose Display document flow.

The sales and distribution portion of the process is now completedbecause the accounting documents were created automatically by thesystem. Clearing the accounting documents is part of the process infinancial accounting.

Task 5:Issue an invoice on the screen.

1. Review the invoice printout to determine whether the delivery conditionsand payment conditions are correct on the form.

Choose output type RD00 and printer LP01.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Display

Billing document→ Issue output to

Output type: RD00→ Print preview

Payment conditions and delivery conditions are shown above the itemsin the invoice.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 217

Page 226: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 5: Sales and Distribution Processes � Data Determination and CollectiveProcessing SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound delivery

in one step� Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

218 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 227: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Trigger different sales processes by choosing suitable sales document types� Explain how the delivering plant, shipping point and route are determined

automatically� Give the customers delivery dates automatically determined in the system

and be able to look at scheduling in detail� Combine and collectively process sales orders due for outbound delivery

in one step� Combine and collectively process documents due for billing in one step

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 219

Page 228: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

220 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 229: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6Availability Check

Unit OverviewThis unit describes the role of the availability check within sales and distributiondocuments. It also provides a brief overview of �transportation processing�.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check� Use the availability check as part of order processing� Explain how deliveries are shipped� Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer� Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document

into the accounting document

Unit ContentsLesson: Basics .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Lesson: Sample Scenarios .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Exercise 9: Availability Check .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Lesson: Transportation Processing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Exercise 10: Transportation Processing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 221

Page 230: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Lesson: Basics

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the basic principles of the availability check.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check

Business Example� You want to create orders for materials, for which there is insufficient stock� To be able to do this, you need to check the available stock and may require

information on the earliest possible delivery dates

Basics

Figure 82: Availability Check in the Sales Order

In the Availability Check field on the Gen./Plant tab page in the material master,enter which and/or what type of availability check should be carried out for thismaterial during order processing.

There are also various tables in Customizing, on which the availability checkis also dependent.

222 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 231: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

Figure 83: Material Availability Date Check

The material availability date is determined from delivery scheduling. On thisdate, enough material has to be available in time for delivery to the customer fortheir requested delivery date.

The system calculates this date, working backwards from the customer's requireddelivery date.

The system calculates the time required for picking, packing, loading andtransporting the goods.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 223

Page 232: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Figure 84: Check at Plant Level

The system accesses information in the following order to propose the standarddelivering plant:

1. Customer-Material Information2. Ship-to party customer master record3. Material master record

If you enter the delivering plant manually during order processing, your entrywill overwrite the default value.

In customer-material info, you can maintain the value proposal for a specificmaterial for a customer.

You can find the delivering plant in the material master on the Sales: Sales Org.1. Delivering plant tab page.

You can find the delivering plant in the customer master on the Shipping tab page:

Figure 85: Control of Availability Check

224 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 233: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

In Customizing, you can configure which elements are included in an availabilitycheck, according to the transaction you are using. In this way, you define whichtypes of stock (for example, safety stock, stock in transfer or stock in qualityinspection), which inward movements (for example, purchase or productionorders), and which outward movements (for example, sales orders, reservationsfrom Materials Management) should be included in the check.

Figure 86: Transfer of Requirements

Communication between sales and distribution and procurement is carried outvia requirements.

The transfer of requirements type can influence the availability check.

The employee responsible for materials planning receives information aboutsales orders in the system and the quantities that SD needs in order to deliverthese orders.

The material for the order can come from in-house production or externalprocurement.

If there is insufficient material available, purchase orders can be made viamaterials planning.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 225

Page 234: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Figure 87: Complete and Partial Deliveries

Any agreements you made with the customer about deliveries also affect the resultof the availability check.

Depending on the agreements for partial/complete delivery in the customersales order, you can deliver an order in one complete delivery or several partialdeliveries.

In a complete delivery, all items with the order quantities are delivered.

For partial deliveries you can distribute items or quantities of one order on severaldeliveries.

Figure 88: Partial Delivery Agreement

226 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 235: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Basics

The indicator for controlling complete/partial deliveries is proposed fromthe customer master record. The proposal for the item level comes from thecustomer-material info, if a customer and material agreement has been maintainedthere. These indicators can be manually changed during sales order entry.

The customer may require, for example, a complete delivery which means that allthe items in the sales order should be delivered together. If the customer agrees toa partial delivery, the order can be met in several deliveries.

If you choose "Complete delivery", you can determine that all the items in a wholeorder must be delivered together. At item level, you can also decide whether youcan split the delivery quantities. The following partial delivery agreements exist:

� _ Partial delivery allowed� A Create a delivery with qty greater than zero� B Create only one delivery (also with quantity = 0)� C Only complete delivery allowed� D No limit to subsequent deliveries

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 227

Page 236: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check

228 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 237: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides a number of sample scenarios to illustrate how the availabilitycheck works. You will also be introduced to backorder processing.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Use the availability check as part of order processing

Business Example� You want to create orders for materials, for which there is insufficient stock.� To do this, you need to check the available stock and may require information

on the earliest possible delivery dates.� In some cases, the customer also allows partial deliveries if the full amount

cannot be delivered on the requested date.

Sample Scenarios

Figure 89: 1. Confirmation on Requested Delivery Date

Using delivery scheduling, the system checks whether the goods will be availablefor the material availability date.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 229

Page 238: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

The availability check includes:

� Current stock� Planned inward movements (such as purchase orders, purchase requisitions,

planned orders)� Forecast outward movements (such as existing sales orders, deliveries).

In case 1, the situation regarding outward movements is as follows:

The existing inward movements are:

� Stock: 100 pieces� Existing purchase orders with quantities of 50 and 60 pieces

The following future outward movements also already exist:

� Existing sales orders with quantities of 100, 40 and 50 units.

In this outbound situation, you now enter another sales order for 10 units.

The system carries out delivery scheduling (backward scheduling) based on thecustomer's requested delivery date and determines the material availability date. Itthen runs an availability check for this date.

Figure 90: Result for Scenario 1: Confirmation on Requested Delivery Date

The availability check shows that the system can confirm the 10 units for therequested delivery date.

230 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 239: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Figure 91: 2. Confirmation for a Later Date

The original situation in Scenario 2 is the same as the first:

The existing inward movements are:

� Stock: 100 pieces� Existing purchase orders with quantities of 50 and 60 pieces

The following future outward movements also already exist:

� Existing sales orders with quantities of 100, 40 and 50 pieces.

In this case, however, the customer requires a "complete delivery"

In this outbound situation, you now enter another sales order for 20 units.

The system carries out delivery scheduling (backward scheduling) based on thecustomer's requested delivery date and determines the material availability date. Itthen runs an availability check for this date.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 231

Page 240: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Figure 92: Result for Scenario 2: Confirmation for a Later Date

In case of stock shortage, the system uses the availability check and deliveryscheduling to determine the next possible date on which the goods can beconfirmed for the customer.

Due to the complete delivery agreement, the quantities cannot be split up.

You have to confirm the 20 units for a later date.

Based on the materials availability date, the system uses delivery scheduling(forward scheduling) to calculate the confirmation date for the 20 units.

232 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 241: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Figure 93: 3. Scenario 3: Partial Deliveries

If the customer and type of sales document allow it, the required sales orderquantity can also be split into several partial deliveries.

The situation in case 3 is the same as for 1 and 2:

The existing inward movements are:

� Stock: 100 pieces� Existing purchase orders with quantities of 50 and 60 pieces

The following future outward movements also already exist:

� Existing sales orders with quantities of 100, 40 and 50 pieces.

In case 3, however, the customer needs the goods as soon as possible and allowsyou to split the delivery quantities up in partial deliveries, if necessary.

In this outbound situation, you now enter another sales order for 20 units.

The system carries out delivery scheduling (backward scheduling) based on thecustomer's requested delivery date and determines the material availability date. Itthen runs an availability check for this date.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 233

Page 242: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Figure 94: Result for Scenario 3: Partial Deliveries

When there is not enough stock, the system uses the availability situation anddelivery scheduling to determine the next possible date for which the goods canbe confirmed to the customer.

The �partial deliveries permitted� agreement means that the quantity can besplit up.

You can confirm the 20 units for two later dates, each with 10 units.

Using the material availability date, the system uses delivery scheduling (forwardscheduling) to calculate two partial deliveries, each with 10 units.

234 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 243: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Figure 95: 4. Check with Replenishment Lead Time

You can take into account all inward and outward movements. It is recommended,however, that you only implement an availability check at the end of thereplenishment lead time.

The replenishment lead time can be specified for each material.

� Trading goods: planned delivery time + goods receipt processing time,� Finished goods: in-house production time.

The system assumes that the material will be available at the end of thereplenishment lead time by the latest.

The availability check is only run until the end of the replenishment lead time.

If you check availability in case 4 without including replenishment lead time, theresult is the same as for case 2. The customer requires a complete delivery. Youcannot make 20 units available until the same date on which the last purchaseorder for 60 units arrives (inward movement).

However, if the system checks availability using the replenishment lead time, youcan make 20 units available for the date on which the purchase order with 50 unitsarrives (inward movement). Only the inward and outward movements that takeplace within the replenishment lead time are included in this check.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 235

Page 244: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Backorder Processing

Figure 96: Backorder Processing

There are two types of backorder processing:

Manual with backorder processing

� You can use backorder processing to list sales documents for materials and toprocess them manually with reference to the confirmation. This means thatATP quantities can be reassigned and any shortfall can be cleared.

Via rescheduling

� You can use the delivery priority (proposed from the customer master recordfor the sales order) as a sorting criteria in automatic rescheduling.

236 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 245: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Exercise 9: Availability Check

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Process orders with a shortage of available stock� Check available stock

Business ExampleYou began marketing a new product two months ago. Demand for this product hasbeen greater than originally anticipated, resulting in stock shortages.

Task 1:Is the implementation of an availability check dependent on the material?

1. You want to determine whether an availability check takes place for thematerial with the number T-AS5## during order entry in plant 1000.

Hint: Display the material master. In the Availability check fieldon the Sales: general/plant tab page, you can see whether anavailability check should be carried out for this material during orderentry, and if so, what type of availability check.

Task 2:You want to determine for which delivering plant the availability check takesplace during order entry.

1. Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for salesorganization 1000, distribution channel 12 from customer master T-AS5##.

___________________________________________________________

Hint: Display the material master. In the Delivering plant field onthe Sales: sales org. 1 tab page, you can see which delivering plantis proposed from the material master during order entry.

2. Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for salesorganization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00 from material masterT-S50B##.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 237

Page 246: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

___________________________________________________________

Hint: Display the customer master. In the Delivering plant field onthe Shipping tab page, enter the delivering plant, proposed duringorder entry from the customer master.

3. In what sequence is the master data accessed during order processing for theplant proposal?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

4. Can the availability check be carried out in another plant as the one proposed?

___________________________________________________________

Task 3:You receive a purchase order.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:Customer: T-S50B##

Purchase order number: 7-311Requested delivery date: in 5 days

Material: T-AS5##Quantity: 10

2. As there is not enough material available for the requested delivery date, thesystem remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, youcan call it up again by selecting Check item availability.

For which plant is availability checked?

___________________________________________________________Continued on next page

238 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 247: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

3. How many pieces can be confirmed for the requested delivery date?

___________________________________________________________

4. How long is it until the complete quantity can be confirmed?

___________________________________________________________

5. Why can the complete quantity not be confirmed on this date?

___________________________________________________________

6. You decide to confirm that a complete delivery will be made to the customerat a later date.

7. Display the schedule lines for item 10. Which lines with schedule lines aredisplayed?

___________________________________________________________

8. Save the order and write down the order number.

___________________________________________________________

Task 4:You receive another purchase order.

1. Create another standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:Customer: T-S50B##Purchase order number: 7-411Requested delivery date: in 5 days

Material: T-AS5##Quantity: 15

2. As there is not enough material available again for the requested deliverydate, the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, youcan call it up again by selecting Check item availability.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 239

Page 248: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

You know that the material can also be taken from plant 1400 in Stuttgart.You therefore want to see if the material could be made available earlierthere. Check the availability for plant 1400.

Hint: To check availability for another plant, choose Other plantson the availability control screen.

3. How many pieces can be confirmed from plant 1400 for the requesteddelivery date ?

___________________________________________________________

4. Why can the full amount be confirmed from plant 1400 on the requesteddelivery date?

___________________________________________________________

5. You decide to deliver the materials to the customer from plant 1400 and makethe full delivery from plant 1400. Save the order and write down the number.

___________________________________________________________

Task 5:You want to display the scope of the check from the previous order.

1. You want to know if purchase orders entered in the system were taken intoaccount during the availability check for the previous order. Display theprevious order and check the elements for inward/outward movements thathave been taken into consideration during the availability check.

Hint: You can display the scope of the check in the sales order fromeither the availability control screen or the availability overviewscreen. Choose Scope of check.

2. You also want to determine whether the replenishment lead time has beentaken into account during the availability check.

Task 6:You receive another purchase order for another material.

1. You want to gain an overview, first of all, of the actual stock andrequirements situation for the other material. Display the current stock andrequirements list for material T-AS4##. Write down how many pieces are instock in plant 1000.

Continued on next page

240 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 249: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

___________________________________________________________

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management.Choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock/Requirements List.

2. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:Customer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 7-621Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material: T-AS4##Quantity: 25

Save the order and write down the order number.

___________________________________________________________

3. You want to gain an overview of the actual stock and requirements situationfor the this material in plant 1000. Display the current stock and requirementslist for material T-AS4##. Record how many units were required in thesales order.

___________________________________________________________

4. On what date was the requirement transferred? Which date in the sales ordercorresponds to this date?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

Task 7:When are Backorders Created?

1. When is a backorder created for an order item?

___________________________________________________________

2. What are the two different types of backorders?

3. Which field from the customer master can be used as a sorting criterionfor rescheduling?

___________________________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 241

Page 250: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Task 8:Questions on the availability check

1. Why can the result of an availability check in the sales order dependent on apartial delivery agreement differ from a normal availability check?

___________________________________________________________

2. Why is the completion of delivery scheduling a prerequisite for theavailability check in the sales order.

___________________________________________________________

3. Why is delivery scheduling carried out after the availability check, if the itemcannot be confirmed for the required delivery date.

___________________________________________________________

242 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 251: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Solution 9: Availability CheckTask 1:Is the implementation of an availability check dependent on the material?

1. You want to determine whether an availability check takes place for thematerial with the number T-AS5## during order entry in plant 1000.

Hint: Display the material master. In the Availability check fieldon the Sales: general/plant tab page, you can see whether anavailability check should be carried out for this material during orderentry, and if so, what type of availability check.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Products→Material→ Trading Goods→ Display

Choose Sales: General/Plant Data.

Plant 1000

An availability check takes place for this material (checking group 01daily requirement).

Task 2:You want to determine for which delivering plant the availability check takesplace during order entry.

1. Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for salesorganization 1000, distribution channel 12 from customer master T-AS5##.

___________________________________________________________

Hint: Display the material master. In the Delivering plant field onthe Sales: sales org. 1 tab page, you can see which delivering plantis proposed from the material master during order entry.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ Products→Material→ Trading Goods→ Display

Choose Sales: sales org. 1.

Sales organization 1000

Distribution channel 12

Delivering plant 1400 is proposed from the material master for thismaterial.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 243

Page 252: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

2. Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for salesorganization 1000, distribution channel 12, division 00 from material masterT-S50B##.

___________________________________________________________

Hint: Display the customer master. In the Delivering plant field onthe Shipping tab page, enter the delivering plant, proposed duringorder entry from the customer master.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Master Data→ BusinessPartner→ Customer→ Display→ Sales/Distribution

Select the Sales Area Data: Shipping tab page.

Delivering plant 1000 is proposed from the customer master for thiscustomer.

3. In what sequence is the master data accessed during order processing for theplant proposal?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

a) During order entry, the plant proposal accesses the master data in thefollowing sequence:

1. Customer-Material Information2. Customer Master3. Material Master

If different delivering plants have been specified in the master data,the proposal which corresponds to this sequence will be transferredfor the sales order items.

4. Can the availability check be carried out in another plant as the one proposed?

___________________________________________________________

a) You have the option of overwriting the proposal manually in thecustomer sales order.

As part of the availability check, you also have the option of checkingin other plants.

Continued on next page

244 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 253: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

Task 3:You receive a purchase order.

1. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:Customer: T-S50B##

Purchase order number: 7-311Requested delivery date: in 5 days

Material: T-AS5##Quantity: 10

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

2. As there is not enough material available for the requested delivery date, thesystem remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, youcan call it up again by selecting Check item availability.

For which plant is availability checked?

___________________________________________________________

a) Plant 1000

3. How many pieces can be confirmed for the requested delivery date?

___________________________________________________________

a) Nothing can be confirmed for the required delivery date.

4. How long is it until the complete quantity can be confirmed?

___________________________________________________________

a) Only at the latest data proposed under Complete delivery/deliveryproposal.

5. Why can the complete quantity not be confirmed on this date?

___________________________________________________________

a) This is the date on which replenishment time ends.Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 245

Page 254: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

6. You decide to confirm that a complete delivery will be made to the customerat a later date.

a) Complete delivery: choose Copy.

7. Display the schedule lines for item 10. Which lines with schedule lines aredisplayed?

___________________________________________________________

a) Choose Schedules lines for item.

There are two schedule lines. The first has the required delivery date,the order quantity and the confirmed quantity 0. The second scheduleline has the confirmed delivery line and the confirmed quantity.

8. Save the order and write down the order number.

___________________________________________________________

a) → Save

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 4:You receive another purchase order.

1. Create another standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:Customer: T-S50B##Purchase order number: 7-411Requested delivery date: in 5 days

Material: T-AS5##Quantity: 15

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create.

2. As there is not enough material available again for the requested deliverydate, the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.

Hint: If you have already left the availability control screen, youcan call it up again by selecting Check item availability.

Continued on next page

246 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 255: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

You know that the material can also be taken from plant 1400 in Stuttgart.You therefore want to see if the material could be made available earlierthere. Check the availability for plant 1400.

Hint: To check availability for another plant, choose Other plantson the availability control screen.

a) Availability control screen

Choose Other plants→ Plant 1400→ Check plants.

The complete quantity can be confirmed on the required date fromplant 1400.

3. How many pieces can be confirmed from plant 1400 for the requesteddelivery date ?

___________________________________________________________

a) 15 units

4. Why can the full amount be confirmed from plant 1400 on the requesteddelivery date?

___________________________________________________________

a) There is sufficient stock in plant 1400 and the replenishment lead timeis shorter.

5. You decide to deliver the materials to the customer from plant 1400 and makethe full delivery from plant 1400. Save the order and write down the number.

___________________________________________________________

a) Choose Copy plant.

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 247

Page 256: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Task 5:You want to display the scope of the check from the previous order.

1. You want to know if purchase orders entered in the system were taken intoaccount during the availability check for the previous order. Display theprevious order and check the elements for inward/outward movements thathave been taken into consideration during the availability check.

Hint: You can display the scope of the check in the sales order fromeither the availability control screen or the availability overviewscreen. Choose Scope of check.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display.

Choose Display availability

Choose Scope of check.

In this case, purchase orders are also checked alongside other inwardand outward movements.

2. You also want to determine whether the replenishment lead time has beentaken into account during the availability check.

a) When you display the Scope of check, the field Check without RLTis not selected. This means that in this case the replenishment leadtime has been taken into account.

Task 6:You receive another purchase order for another material.

1. You want to gain an overview, first of all, of the actual stock andrequirements situation for the other material. Display the current stock andrequirements list for material T-AS4##. Write down how many pieces are instock in plant 1000.

___________________________________________________________

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materials management.Choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock/Requirements List.

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock/Requirements List.

You can see the plant stock in the line with the MRP element W-BEST,in the Available qty column.

Continued on next page

248 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 257: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

2. Create a standard order based on the purchase order.

Purchase order:Customer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 7-621Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material: T-AS4##Quantity: 25

Save the order and write down the order number.

___________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create→Save

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

3. You want to gain an overview of the actual stock and requirements situationfor the this material in plant 1000. Display the current stock and requirementslist for material T-AS4##. Record how many units were required in thesales order.

___________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock/Requirements List.

You can see the requirement from the sales order in the line with theMRP element K-AUFT, in the Rec./reqd quantity column.

25 units

4. On what date was the requirement transferred? Which date in the sales ordercorresponds to this date?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

a) The requirements date (date in the first column) corresponds to thematerial availability date from the sales order.

Task 7:When are Backorders Created?

1. When is a backorder created for an order item?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 249

Page 258: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

___________________________________________________________

a) A backorder can be executed if an order item is backdated. An orderitem is backdated if the order quantity is not complete or the requireddelivery date has not been confirmed in time.

2. What are the two different types of backorders?

a) A backorder can be implemented using manual backorder processing orrescheduling.

3. Which field from the customer master can be used as a sorting criterionfor rescheduling?

___________________________________________________________

a) The delivery priority is taken from the customer master in the salesorder and can be used as a sort criterion for orders during rescheduling.

Task 8:Questions on the availability check

1. Why can the result of an availability check in the sales order dependent on apartial delivery agreement differ from a normal availability check?

___________________________________________________________

a) If only part of the required quantity is available on the required deliverydate and the customer agrees to a partial delivery, then a deliverysplit can be carried out and a partial quantity can be confirmed forthe required delivery date.

If the customer does not allow partial delivery, the complete amountcan only be confirmed for a later date.

2. Why is the completion of delivery scheduling a prerequisite for theavailability check in the sales order.

___________________________________________________________

a) The availability check takes place on the material availability date.The materials are required on this date, so that there is enough timeremaining for packing, loading and so on before the required deliverydate. This means the material availability date must be determinedin the sales order before the availability check is carried out. It isdetermined using delivery scheduling.

3. Why is delivery scheduling carried out after the availability check, if the itemcannot be confirmed for the required delivery date.

Continued on next page

250 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 259: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sample Scenarios

___________________________________________________________

a) If the item could not be confirmed for the required delivery date, thenthe system carries out delivery scheduling from the earliest possibledate available (forward scheduling), in order to determine the deliverydate (confirmation date).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 251

Page 260: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Use the availability check as part of order processing

252 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 261: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

Lesson: Transportation Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides a brief overview of transportation processing options.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain how deliveries are shipped� Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer� Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document

into the accounting document

Business Example� You want to transport materials from more than one delivery on one truck.� Freight costs are incurred, which you bill to the customer.� You want to check which accounts have been posted in the account document

belonging to the billing document.

Transportation Processing

Figure 97: Document Flow with Outgoing Shipment

The shipment function is optional.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 253

Page 262: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

You can use it to combine deliveries with the same transportation requirements,such as forwarding agent, destination, route or means of transport.

Normally, you create a shipment before you post goods issue.

The settlement of shipment costs from the shipment is also optional.

Figure 98: Creating Shipment Documents

Using the �Create shipment� function, the system determines the deliveries duefor transportation and creates the shipments required.

The individual deliveries can be assigned to the shipments manually. Thesequence of the deliveries within a shipment is determined automatically fromthe sequence in which they are listed.

Figure 99: Loading and Packing Shipments

254 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 263: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

At the time of shipment, items which were not already packed in the delivery, canbe packed in shipping units using shipping materials. The functionality used hereis basically the same as for loading in the delivery. However, items cannot begenerated or entered manually for inventory management/billing.

Packed items are assigned to the required means of transport (trucks, for example).

Shipping units from the delivery are copied and can no longer be changed.

Unlike packing in the delivery, packing in the shipment can be carried out forseveral deliveries.

Figure 100: Billing Shipment Costs to the Customer

You can invoice the customer for shipment costs, which are based on effectiveshipment costs, that have been calculated in the transportation and shipment costprocessing areas for settlement with the forwarding agent. The freight costs thenappear as an additional entry in the customer billing document.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 255

Page 264: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Figure 101: Connection to Financial Accounting

The system transfers billing document data in invoices, credit and debit memos tofinancial accounting and posts this to the determined accounts.

You can set account determination to be dependent on various different criteriain Customizing, so that the corresponding accounts can be determined. Thefollowing criteria are defined in the standard system:

� Chart of accounts� Sales organization� Account assignment group of the payer

(customers can be categorized, for example, according to whether they aredomestic or foreign customers)

� Account assignment group of the material

(materials can be categorized, for example, according to whether they areservices or retail goods)

� Account key (it is possible to divide this up into the different price, surplusand discount elements)

Setting account determination requires agreement from financial accounting andcost accounting, for the reasons mentioned above.

256 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 265: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

Exercise 10: Transportation Processing

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Edit partial deliveries� Describe transportation processing� Carry out account determination for a billing document in the accounting

document.

Business ExampleAlthough you are able to deliver the complete quantity on the requested deliverydate, the customer only wants to receive part of the delivery at this point.

As there are other customer outbound deliveries to make on the day that thedelivery is due, which are on route to this particular customer, you can put severaloutbound deliveries together in one shipment. The shipment costs can then bedivided accordingly amongst the individual customers.

After the process has been completed and the invoices are created, you want toensure that the right accounts have been posted in accounting.

Task 1:A sales order should be partially delivered.

1. Display the standard order from the last exercise on the screen. Determinewhether the order could be partially delivered.

Which agreement referring to a complete delivery can be seen in the orderheader?

Hint: The Complete Delivery field in the order header is on theSales overview screen and on the Shipping tab page.

__________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 257

Page 266: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

2. What master data is used for proposing the Complete Delivery flag in theorder header?

3. Do you have the option of distributing individual order items (with thecorresponding item order quantity) to different deliveries, if the fieldComplete Delivery is not checked in the order header?

4. Do you have the option of distributing the full amount of order items todifferent deliveries, if the Complete Delivery field is not checked in theorder header?

5. What agreements referring to partial deliveries can be found in item 10of the order?

___________________________________________________________

Hint: You can find the Part.dlv./item field for the order item onthe Shipping tab page.

6. What master data is used for proposing the Partial Delivery flag in theorder item?

__________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

258 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 267: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

7. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order (from exercise6-2). In this delivery, only 10 units from the total of 25 units should bedelivered initially.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Change the quantity to be delivered to 10 pieces.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

_______________________________________________

Task 2:You want to examine possible methods of transport for the delivery.

1. Check whether the outbound delivery you have already created (fromexercise 1-7) can be processed for transport.

What is the transportation planning status of the delivery?

Hint: Display the outbound delivery on the screen. On the Transporttab page, you can see whether this delivery can be processedfor transport in the Trns.plan.stat. field. Use F1 help to see anexplanation of the status.

________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 259

Page 268: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

2. You want to load several items from different deliveries, that all have thesame ship-to party, into the container. Do you have the option of doingthis in the shipment document and entering which items are to be loadedinto which container?

3. You have put together several deliveries for different customers in Hamburginto one shipment document for one lorry load. Do you have the optionof dividing the shipping costs to the customer depending on the numberof items being delivered to them?

4. What is the difference between a shipment document and a transfer order?

Task 3:You want to pick your delivery, post goods issue and bill the transaction. You thenwant to check which accounts have been found in the accounting document.

1. First enter the transfer order for picking for the previous delivery forwarehouse number 010 in plant 1000. Write down the document number.

________________________________

2. Post goods issue for the outbound delivery.

3. Enter a billing document for the outbound delivery and write the documentnumber.

________________________________

Continued on next page

260 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 269: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

4. Display the accounting document for the billing document and write downwhich accounts have been posted for which amounts.

Hint: You can display the accounting document for the billingdocument with the transaction Display billing document:

Choose Accounting overview and select the accounting document.

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 261

Page 270: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

Solution 10: Transportation ProcessingTask 1:A sales order should be partially delivered.

1. Display the standard order from the last exercise on the screen. Determinewhether the order could be partially delivered.

Which agreement referring to a complete delivery can be seen in the orderheader?

Hint: The Complete Delivery field in the order header is on theSales overview screen and on the Shipping tab page.

__________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Choose the Shipping tab page.

The Complete dlv. field is not selected. This means that individualitems can be split up into separate deliveries.

2. What master data is used for proposing the Complete Delivery flag in theorder header?

Answer: The indicator for Complete delivery in the order header is proposedfrom the customer master.

3. Do you have the option of distributing individual order items (with thecorresponding item order quantity) to different deliveries, if the fieldComplete Delivery is not checked in the order header?

Answer: Yes. Items can be split up into separate deliveries.

4. Do you have the option of distributing the full amount of order items todifferent deliveries, if the Complete Delivery field is not checked in theorder header?

Answer: If the Complete delivery field is not selected in the order header,then it is still dependent on the partial delivery agreement at item level,whether the amount ordered can be divided up.

5. What agreements referring to partial deliveries can be found in item 10of the order?

Continued on next page

262 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 271: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

___________________________________________________________

Hint: You can find the Part.dlv./item field for the order item onthe Shipping tab page.

a) On the Shipping tab page for item 10, the Part.dlv./item field is empty(Partial deliveries allowed). This means that partial deliveries areallowed.

6. What master data is used for proposing the Partial Delivery flag in theorder item?

__________________________________________________________

a) The proposal for the Part.dlv./item field in the order item comes fromthe customer master. If a customer-material info already exists for thecustomer and the material, and the proposal here is different to that inthe customer master, then this proposal has priority.

7. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order (from exercise6-2). In this delivery, only 10 units from the total of 25 units should bedelivered initially.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Change the quantity to be delivered to 10 pieces.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.

_______________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

Change quantity to be delivered to 10 units.

→ Save

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 2:You want to examine possible methods of transport for the delivery.

1. Check whether the outbound delivery you have already created (fromexercise 1-7) can be processed for transport.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 263

Page 272: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

What is the transportation planning status of the delivery?

Hint: Display the outbound delivery on the screen. On the Transporttab page, you can see whether this delivery can be processedfor transport in the Trns.plan.stat. field. Use F1 help to see anexplanation of the status.

________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Display

Choose the Transport tab page.

A is entered in the Trns.plan.stat. field. This means that the outbounddelivery has not yet been processed in a shipment document.

It may also be the case that a delivery is not relevant for a shipmentdocument (depending on the delivery type).

2. You want to load several items from different deliveries, that all have thesame ship-to party, into the container. Do you have the option of doingthis in the shipment document and entering which items are to be loadedinto which container?

Answer: You can specify which items are to be loaded together into acontainer in the shipment document. You can also load items for differentdeliveries together into one container.

3. You have put together several deliveries for different customers in Hamburginto one shipment document for one lorry load. Do you have the optionof dividing the shipping costs to the customer depending on the numberof items being delivered to them?

Answer: Yes. You can enter the shipment costs into a shipment costdocument and distribute these accordingly amongst customers.

4. What is the difference between a shipment document and a transfer order?

Answer: The shipment document is created and used to group togetherseveral deliveries for one shipment to a customer. For example, for onelorry driver.The transfer request acts as a basis for picking.It is created for a delivery, to control internal material movements.

Continued on next page

264 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 273: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

Task 3:You want to pick your delivery, post goods issue and bill the transaction. You thenwant to check which accounts have been found in the accounting document.

1. First enter the transfer order for picking for the previous delivery forwarehouse number 010 in plant 1000. Write down the document number.

________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Picking→ Create Transfer Order→ Single Document

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

2. Post goods issue for the outbound delivery.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Change→ Single Document

Choose Post Goods Issue.

3. Enter a billing document for the outbound delivery and write the documentnumber.

________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Create

Choose Execute→ Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

4. Display the accounting document for the billing document and write downwhich accounts have been posted for which amounts.

Hint: You can display the accounting document for the billingdocument with the transaction Display billing document:

Choose Accounting overview and select the accounting document.

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 265

Page 274: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 6: Availability Check SCM600

_________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Display

Choose Accounting.

Select the accounting document.

Debit posting is posted for the customer account and credit posting isbooked for the output tax and sales revenue accounts.

The debit postings are made on the payer's account. The offsettingpostings are made on the revenue accounts, sales deduction accountsand, in some cases, the output tax accounts.

266 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 275: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Transportation Processing

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain how deliveries are shipped� Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer� Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document

into the accounting document

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 267

Page 276: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the basic principles and function of the availability check� Use the availability check as part of order processing� Explain how deliveries are shipped� Describe how shipment costs are billed to the customer� Explain how financial information is transferred from the billing document

into the accounting document

268 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 277: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7Make-To-Order

Unit OverviewThis unit first explains the function of the item category. It then looks at theinquiry/quotation presales documents and provides a sample process illustratingsales order processing.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Describe presales activities� Use inquiries and quotations� Explain key functions of item categories� Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders� Pack items in an outbound delivery

Unit ContentsLesson: Presales Processing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270Lesson: Function of the Item Category .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

Exercise 11: Presales Processes and the Item Category .. . . . . . . . . . . .277Lesson: Assembly Processing ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

Exercise 12: Assembly Processing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 269

Page 278: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Lesson: Presales Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson covers inquiries and quotations.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe presales activities� Use inquiries and quotations

Business Example� Before placing an order, the customer wants to find out about material

prices and delivery times.� You make the customer a quotation for the materials offered.� The customer accepts the quotation and places an order.

Presales Processing

Figure 102: Sales Support Tasks

270 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 279: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Presales Processing

Support for the employees in Sales and Distribution and Marketing for all theactivities involved in acquiring and taking care of customers. You can implementthe following activities in the Sales Support System:

� Prepare information about customers, prospective customers, contact people,competitors, and their products.

� Manage sales activities, such as telephone calls and customer visits� Carry out direct mailing campaigns� Direct access to the Sales Information System (SIS) with a wide range

of evaluations for things such as sales volume figures and the number ofincoming orders.

Figure 103: Presales Documents

You receive inquiries from customers asking, for example, about prices or deliverytimes for certain goods.

You offer your customer a quotation for a certain material with information aboutprices, delivery times, etc.

Figure 104: Document Flow in the Presales Phase

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 271

Page 280: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

In the standard system, the inquiry is taken as being completely referenced as soonas the customer receives a quotation referring to the inquiry.

A quotation can be referenced for as long as it takes for the full amount or thevalidity date to be reached.

The document flow in the presales phase can comprise both inquiries andquotations. If a customer accepts a quotation, the sales order follows.

You can also create quotations without having an inquiry from a customer.

272 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 281: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Presales Processing

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe presales activities� Use inquiries and quotations

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 273

Page 282: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Lesson: Function of the Item Category

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the item category, which is a key control instrument.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain key functions of item categories

Business Example� The item category is a key instrument for controlling sales and distribution

processes.

Function of the Item Category

Figure 105: Item Categories

Item categories provide additional control functions for the sales documents.

By using an item category, the system can process a material differently in eachsales document type.

The item category in the sales document is defined using the sales documenttype and the material.

274 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 283: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

An item category can influence, for example:

� Whether the system runs automatic pricing� Whether the item appears on an invoice� Which fields are recorded in the incompletion log if they were not entered

in the order� Which partner functions belong to the item� Which text types belong to the item� Whether the item appears on a delivery� Whether you can create schedule lines for the item

Figure 106: Item Category Determination Normal Item

The item category in the sales document is found using the sales document typeand the item category group from the material master.

The item category group is maintained in the material master on the Sales: salesorg. 2 tab page.

Another item category from the one in the standard order is found for the materialwith the item category group Norm.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 275

Page 284: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Figure 107: Item Category Determination in the Standard Order

The item category in the sales document is found using the sales document typeand the item category group from the material master.

The item category group is maintained in the material master on the Sales: salesorg. 2 tab page.

Another item category than that for a material with item category group 0001 isfound for a material with the item category group Norm.

276 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 285: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

Exercise 11: Presales Processes and theItem Category

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Process inquiries and quotations� Understand item category determination.

Business ExampleYou receive a customer inquiry about motorbikes. You can use this inquiry tocreate a quotation. Information defined in the quotations, such as prices anddelivery conditions, is binding and valid for a specific period.

Task 1:Create an inquiry.

1. You receive a written inquiry from a customer for a motorbike. You want theinquiry to be processed by the end of the month.

Inquiry

Customer: T-S50A## Motomarkt Heidelberg

We purchased motorbike T-AS3## from you last year. We are interested inpurchasing 3 more. Would you please make a quotation for us?

Hint: To create inquiries, choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Inquiry→ Create.

During inquiry creation the field Valid to is entered as a processingdeadline and is also used later in quotation processing.

Create the inquiry and write down the number.

___________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 277

Page 286: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Task 2:Create a quotation.

1. The next day you process the inquiries received. First of all you create alist of all inquiries for customer T-S50A##, that need to be processed bythe end of the month.

Hint: To create quotation lists, choose

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→ Inquiries→ Inquiries List

2. Create a quotation for the inquiry.

As there is currently a lot of demand for this motorbike, you only want tooffer the customer 2 units. The quotation should be valid from today until theend of the month after next. Create the inquiry and write down the number.

___________________________________

Hint: To enter the quotation with reference to the inquiry, chooseLogistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Quotation→ Create.Choose Create with Reference.

Task 3:Create an order with reference to the quotation.

1. Customer T-S50A## orders 1 unit of motorbike T-AS3## as a result ofthe quotation.

Purchase order from the quotation

Customer: T-S50A##

Purchase order number: 8-131

Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS3## 1

Create the standard order and write down the number.

___________________________________

Continued on next page

278 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 287: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

Task 4:Determine the reference status for the items in the inquiry and the quotation fromthe previous exercises.

Hint: The status overview for the individual documents can be displayedfrom the document flow.

1. Display the reference status for the item in the inquiry.

__________________________________________________

2. Display the reference status for the item in the quotation.

__________________________________________________

Task 5:Questions on the presales documents.

1. Name some of the differences between an inquiry and a quotation.

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

2. Does an inquiry have to be set up before a quotation can be created?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

3. Does automatic pricing take place during entry of quotations or inquiries?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

4. Do you have the option of carrying out the availability check in an inquiry ora quotation as you do in the sales order?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

Task 6:How is the item category found in the sales document?

1. Display the last inquiry processed and write down which item categoryhas been found.

__________________________________________________________Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 279

Page 288: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

2. What does item category determination in the sales document depend on?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

3. Can different items be created in an order with different item categories?

__________________________________________________________

4. Can you set an item in an inquiry so that it is not relevant for billing andthat an item in a sales order is relevant for billing, depending on the itemcategory?

__________________________________________________________

280 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 289: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

Solution 11: Presales Processes and theItem CategoryTask 1:Create an inquiry.

1. You receive a written inquiry from a customer for a motorbike. You want theinquiry to be processed by the end of the month.

Inquiry

Customer: T-S50A## Motomarkt Heidelberg

We purchased motorbike T-AS3## from you last year. We are interested inpurchasing 3 more. Would you please make a quotation for us?

Hint: To create inquiries, choose Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Inquiry→ Create.

During inquiry creation the field Valid to is entered as a processingdeadline and is also used later in quotation processing.

Create the inquiry and write down the number.

___________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Inquiry→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 281

Page 290: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Task 2:Create a quotation.

1. The next day you process the inquiries received. First of all you create alist of all inquiries for customer T-S50A##, that need to be processed bythe end of the month.

Hint: To create quotation lists, choose

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→ Inquiries→ Inquiries List

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→Inquiries→ Inquiries List

Sold-to party T-S50A##

2. Create a quotation for the inquiry.

As there is currently a lot of demand for this motorbike, you only want tooffer the customer 2 units. The quotation should be valid from today until theend of the month after next. Create the inquiry and write down the number.

___________________________________

Hint: To enter the quotation with reference to the inquiry, chooseLogistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Quotation→ Create.Choose Create with Reference.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Quotation→ Create

Choose Create with Reference.

Enter the inquiry number.

Choose Selection list.

Change the quantity to 2 units.

Choose Copy.

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 3:Create an order with reference to the quotation.

1. Customer T-S50A## orders 1 unit of motorbike T-AS3## as a result ofthe quotation.

Continued on next page

282 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 291: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

Purchase order from the quotation

Customer: T-S50A##

Purchase order number: 8-131

Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material QuantityT-AS3## 1

Create the standard order and write down the number.

___________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Choose Create with Reference.

Enter the quotation number.

Choose Selection list.

Change the quantity to 1 unit.

Choose Copy.

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 4:Determine the reference status for the items in the inquiry and the quotation fromthe previous exercises.

Hint: The status overview for the individual documents can be displayedfrom the document flow.

1. Display the reference status for the item in the inquiry.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 283

Page 292: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

__________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Inquiry→ Display→Environment→ Display document flow

Position the cursor on Inquiry and then choose Status overview.

Expand Item 10

Reference status: fully referenced

The reference status for the inquiry states that it is completelyreferenced, although only 2 from the 3 units have been copied into thequotation. An inquiry is indicated as being completely referenced inthe standard system, as soon as a quotation (regardless of the quantity)has been created for the inquiry.

2. Display the reference status for the item in the quotation.

__________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Quotation→ Display→ Environment→ Display document flow

Position the cursor on Quotation and then choose Status overview.

Expand Item 10

Reference status: partially referenced

The reference status for the quotation is partially referenced. Onlyone piece was copied from the quotation amount (2 pieces) into the salesorder. A quotation is indicated as partially referenced in the standardsystem until the full amount has been transferred into the orders.

Task 5:Questions on the presales documents.

1. Name some of the differences between an inquiry and a quotation.

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) Inquiries are customer requests for quotations. Inquiries come fromcustomers. Quotations are made to customers.

For inquiries, the validity date is used in the system as a processingdeadline for an answer to the inquiry. Quotations are legally bindingduring the customer validity period.

2. Does an inquiry have to be set up before a quotation can be created?

Continued on next page

284 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 293: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) No. Quotations without reference to an inquiry can also be created.

3. Does automatic pricing take place during entry of quotations or inquiries?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. Automatic pricing takes place (dependent on Customizing) duringinquiry and quotation creation.

4. Do you have the option of carrying out the availability check in an inquiry ora quotation as you do in the sales order?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. An availability check is carried out during inquiry and quotationentry in the same way as during sales order entry (dependent onCustomizing).

Task 6:How is the item category found in the sales document?

1. Display the last inquiry processed and write down which item categoryhas been found.

__________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Inquiry→ Display

The item category AFN for Inquiry item is on the Sales tab page.

2. What does item category determination in the sales document depend on?

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

a) The item category is found in the material master and is dependent onthe sales document type (inquiry, quotation, standard order,...) andthe item category group.

3. Can different items be created in an order with different item categories?

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. Different items can be created in an order with different itemcategories.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 285

Page 294: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

4. Can you set an item in an inquiry so that it is not relevant for billing andthat an item in a sales order is relevant for billing, depending on the itemcategory?

__________________________________________________________

a) Yes. Billing relevance, pricing, delivery relevance and the incompletionlog, for example, can be set in Customizing, dependent on itemcategories.

286 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 295: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the Item Category

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain key functions of item categories

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 287

Page 296: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Lesson: Assembly Processing

Lesson OverviewThis lesson contains a sample process to demonstrate collaboration between Salesand Distribution and Production.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders� Pack items in an outbound delivery

Business Example� The customer orders a petrol tank that is specially manufactured for his

own requirements.� This requires cooperation between Sales and Distribution and Manufacturing.� Before the petrol tank is delivered, it must be packed.

Assembly Processing

Figure 108: Make-To-Order Flow

Make-to-order production is characterized by the fact that materials are not storedin the warehouse but produced especially for a particular sales order.

288 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 297: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

An individual customer requirement is generated from the sales order item andtransferred to materials planning.

You can use materials planning to plan requirements. Once this has been done,production is carried out. After the product has been manufactured, you post it bygoods receipt to sales orders stock specifically for this sales order item.

As soon as the delivery is due, you can enter the delivery in SD and post goodsissue. This reduces the sales order stock. Then you enter a billing document in SD.

Figure 109: Make-To-Order Production without Assembly Processing

The requirement quantity (planned independent requirements), delivery date andconfiguration specifications are transferred from the sales order to materialsplanning as an individual customer requirement.

You then use a planning run to generate a planned order. Here, bills of materialare exploded and dependent requirements for the assemblies and componentsare generated.

As soon as production can start, you create a production order from the plannedorder.

The system returns the confirmed quantity and delivery date from the productionorder to the sales order.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 289

Page 298: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Figure 110: Make-To-Order Production with Assembly Processing

The individual components for the final product have already been producedfor make-to-order production with assembly production. You then only need toassemble the components according to the customer's wishes. This means youneed just a one-level bill of material explosion and you do not need to generatedependent requirements.

This means that you do not need a planning run at this point for make-to-orderproduction with assembly processing. You can create a production order directlyfrom the sales order.

The system returns the confirmed quantity and delivery date from the productionorder to the schedule lines in the sales order.

Any changes made to the confirmed schedule lines or the delivery date areimmediately visible in the sales order and/or in the production order.

Figure 111: Cost Management per Item

290 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 299: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

In sales order processing, the costs and sales revenue for a sales order item arecollected in a controlling object for that item and settled in a profitability analysis.

Pricing in the sales order determines the planned sales revenues (net value 2) andthe actual sales revenue is posted in the billing document.

The planned costs are compared to the revenues. They arise from product orunit costing, or from the valuation price in the material master (standard price ormoving average price).

The actual costs are calculated from the withdrawal, production orders, internalactivity allocation and surcharges.

The accrued actual sales revenues and costs are settled in the profitability analysisto determine the profit or loss.

Figure 112: Packing

During packing, delivery items can be assigned to packaging materials. Thehandling units created by this can then be packed in additional packagingmaterials.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 291

Page 300: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Figure 113: Delivery from Sales Order Stock

After the material has been produced, it is posted as a goods receipt to the salesorder stock.

Sales order stock is special stock which can be used only for the special sales order.

During goods issue of the delivery, the sales order stock is reduced accordingly.

292 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 301: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

Exercise 12: Assembly Processing

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Understand the make-to-order process� Pack items into the outbound delivery.

Business ExampleA customer orders a specially lacquered petrol tank from you in accordancewith his own personal requirements. You also send him assembly instructionsand go-faster stripes for his car. The individual materials should be packed intoa carton for shipping.

Task 1:Process make-to-order production.

1. The customer orders a petrol tank for his motorbike. He has requested thatyou lacquer and assemble the tank before it is delivered. The material masterT-FS1##, a bill of material and a work plan have already been created.Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order.

Purchase order

Customer: T-S50A##

Purchase order number: 8-311

Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material

T-FS1##

Quantity: 1

Hint: Do not save the order yet!

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 293

Page 302: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

2. You give out assembly instructions T-AS7## and go-faster stripes T-AS8##free of charge with the petrol tank. Therefore, enter both materials in theabove sales order as well.

Hint: As you want to make it clear in the sales order that bothmaterials belong to petrol tank T-FS1##, enter both items underthe higher-level item 10.

For lower-level items, enter 10 in the Item Overview field.

3. What item categories do the three items have?

4. What is the net price of the three items?

5. Save the sales order and write down the number.

________________________________________

Task 2:

1. Display the sales order that you created in the previous task.

Check the procurement data for petrol tank T-FS1## on the schedule linefor item 10.

Hint: To reach the procurement data for the schedule line, chooseSchedule line for item and then Procurement.

Write down the number of the assembly order.

______________________________________

2. Display the assembly order header. Note the basic dates for the start andfinish of the assembly order.

Continued on next page

294 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 303: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

______________________________________

______________________________________

3. Which date in the sales order corresponds to the end date in the assemblyorder?

Task 3:The customer informs you that he would like to have petrol tank T-FS1##delivered 8 days later. Change the requested delivery date for item 10accordingly in the sales order.

1. Write down what effects the assigned items 11 and 12 will have on therequested delivery date.

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

2. Display the assembly order header for petrol tank T-FS1## (item 10). Writedown how the end date has changed.

_______________________________________________________

Hint: To display the assembly order from the sales order, chooseSchedule lines for item→ Procurement→ Header in the sales order.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 295

Page 304: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Task 4:Enter goods receipt.

1. Production gives you notice that the petrol tank is assembled. In materialsmanagement, enter the goods receipt for the assembly order in the sales orderstock in plant 1000, storage location 0001.

Hint: To enter the goods receipt in materials management, choose:

Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ For Order

Movement type 101

Order Assembly order number (see exercise 2-1)

Plant 1000

Storage location 0001

2. Display the sales order stock in the stock overview for material T-FS1## inplant 1000.

Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management,choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

__________________________

Task 5:Process shipping.

1. Enter the outbound delivery for the previous sales order and pack the items.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Pack three items in packaging material PK-096.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the delivery number.

_______________________________________________

2. Pick the delivery and post the goods issue.

(Warehouse number 010)Continued on next page

296 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 305: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

3. To conclude, display the sales order stock in the stock overview for materialT-FS1## in plant 1000. How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

___________________________

Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management,choose:

Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 297

Page 306: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Solution 12: Assembly ProcessingTask 1:Process make-to-order production.

1. The customer orders a petrol tank for his motorbike. He has requested thatyou lacquer and assemble the tank before it is delivered. The material masterT-FS1##, a bill of material and a work plan have already been created.Create a standard order based on the existing purchase order.

Purchase order

Customer: T-S50A##

Purchase order number: 8-311

Requested delivery date: in 10 days

Material

T-FS1##

Quantity: 1

Hint: Do not save the order yet!

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

2. You give out assembly instructions T-AS7## and go-faster stripes T-AS8##free of charge with the petrol tank. Therefore, enter both materials in theabove sales order as well.

Hint: As you want to make it clear in the sales order that bothmaterials belong to petrol tank T-FS1##, enter both items underthe higher-level item 10.

For lower-level items, enter 10 in the Item Overview field.

a) Enter sub-items.

For sub-items, enter 10 in the Item Overview field.

Continued on next page

298 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 307: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

3. What item categories do the three items have?

Answer: Item 10: make-to-order production TAKItem 11: free item TANNItem 12: free item TANN

4. What is the net price of the three items?

Answer: Item 10: 297Item 11: 0Item 12: 0

5. Save the sales order and write down the number.

________________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 2:

1. Display the sales order that you created in the previous task.

Check the procurement data for petrol tank T-FS1## on the schedule linefor item 10.

Hint: To reach the procurement data for the schedule line, chooseSchedule line for item and then Procurement.

Write down the number of the assembly order.

______________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Item 10: Choose Schedule lines for item.

Choose Procurement.

The document number for the assembly order has been assignedinternally.

2. Display the assembly order header. Note the basic dates for the start andfinish of the assembly order.

______________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 299

Page 308: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

______________________________________

a) Choose Header.

The end and start dates have been calculated by the system. Backwardscheduling for the assembly order is carried out on the basis of thework plans for the material (petrol tank). Backscheduling is carriedout from the sales order material staging date.

3. Which date in the sales order corresponds to the end date in the assemblyorder?

Answer: The end date of the assembly order corresponds to the materialstaging date in the sales order.

Task 3:The customer informs you that he would like to have petrol tank T-FS1##delivered 8 days later. Change the requested delivery date for item 10accordingly in the sales order.

1. Write down what effects the assigned items 11 and 12 will have on therequested delivery date.

_________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Change

Item 10: Change requested delivery date to 8 days later.

The required delivery date for items 11 and 12 changes according to thedate in item 10, as they are subordinate to this item.

2. Display the assembly order header for petrol tank T-FS1## (item 10). Writedown how the end date has changed.

Continued on next page

300 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 309: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

_______________________________________________________

Hint: To display the assembly order from the sales order, chooseSchedule lines for item→ Procurement→ Header in the sales order.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Display

Item 10: Choose Schedule lines for item.

Choose Procurement.

Choose Header.

As the required delivery date was changed in the previous exercise, anew material staging date was determined in the sales order. This newmaterial staging date has been transferred to the assembly order as anew end date.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 301

Page 310: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

Task 4:Enter goods receipt.

1. Production gives you notice that the petrol tank is assembled. In materialsmanagement, enter the goods receipt for the assembly order in the sales orderstock in plant 1000, storage location 0001.

Hint: To enter the goods receipt in materials management, choose:

Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ For Order

Movement type 101

Order Assembly order number (see exercise 2-1)

Plant 1000

Storage location 0001

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Goods Movement→ Goods Receipt→ For Order

Movement type 101

Order Assembly order number (see exercise 2-1)

Plant 1000

Storage location 0001

Choose Adopt + Details.

Choose Save.

2. Display the sales order stock in the stock overview for material T-FS1## inplant 1000.

Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management,choose Logistics → Materials Management → InventoryManagement→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

__________________________

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

1 unit exists in the sales order stock.

Continued on next page

302 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 311: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

Task 5:Process shipping.

1. Enter the outbound delivery for the previous sales order and pack the items.

Hint: To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, setthe selection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Pack three items in packaging material PK-096.

Save the outbound delivery and write down the delivery number.

_______________________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

Choose Pack.

Packaging material PK-096

Select the shipping unit and the items to be packed.

Choose Pack.

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

2. Pick the delivery and post the goods issue.

(Warehouse number 010)

a) Picking:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Picking→ Create Transfer Order→ Single Document

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Goods issue:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Change→ Single Document

Choose Post Goods Issue.

3. To conclude, display the sales order stock in the stock overview for materialT-FS1## in plant 1000. How many pieces are there in the sales order stock?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 303

Page 312: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 7: Make-To-Order SCM600

___________________________

Hint: To display the stock overview in materials management,choose:

Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview

There is no longer any sales order stock.

304 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 313: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Assembly Processing

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders� Pack items in an outbound delivery

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 305

Page 314: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe presales activities� Use inquiries and quotations� Explain key functions of item categories� Track the status of assembly orders for make-to-order sales orders� Pack items in an outbound delivery

306 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 315: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8Complaints Processing

Unit OverviewThis unit focuses on the complaints processing options available for sales anddistribution processes.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distributionprocess

� Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Carry out and explain in detail returns processing� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail� Cancel a billing document

Unit ContentsLesson: Credit Memo Requests .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Lesson: Returns.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Exercise 13: Complaints Processing .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 307

Page 316: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Lesson: Credit Memo Requests

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains how credit memos are processed.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distributionprocess

� Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing

Business Example� Damaged or faulty goods and incorrect invoices result in complaints.� If the complaint is justified, the customers receive a credit memo. It must be

ensured here that the correct amount is credited to the customer account.� Before a credit memo is issued, it must be approved by an authorized person.

Overview

Figure 114: Processes in Complaints Processing

You create returns, a credit and debit memo request, a credit and debit memo or aninvoice correction request after you have:

� Created a sales order� Delivered the goods to the customer, and billed the customer for the goods

308 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 317: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Credit Memo Requests

Create a return request (authorization) if the customer returns the goods to you.

You create an invoice correction request if there is a price or quantity deviation.

You can create the returns or a credit or debit memo request with reference to asales order or a billing document.

You create the invoice correction request or credit/debit memo (withoutcredit/memo request) with reference to the billing document.

For returns, credit/debit memo request or invoice correction request, billing takesplace after checking and approval, by creating a credit or debit memo.

Process

Figure 115: Processing Credit and Debit Memos

Credit memos are processed in a similar manner to debit memos.

Credit and debit memo requests can be created with reference to a billingdocument or a sales order. In this way, the system can determine the correctamount from the preceding document.

For evaluation purposes, you must enter an order reason.

The credit/debit memo request contains a billing block, which prevents immediatebilling. Once the process has been checked, it is approved by removing the billingblock.

When the billing documents are posted (credit/debit memo), the requiredaccounting documents are generated automatically. In this way, the correctamounts are credited to or debited from the customer account.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 309

Page 318: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Figure 116: Approving a Credit Memo

Before a credit memo can be created, the process requires that an approval orcheck step is carried out. This is implemented by means of a billing block.

� The return, credit memo request, debit memo request, and invoice correctionrequest documents contain a billing block.

These documents are checked by an employee with the appropriate authorization.Unjustified complaints are rejected and the reason for the rejection is enteredagainst the item(s) in question. Once all the items have been checked, thedocument can be released for billing. At this point, the billing block is removed.

Rejected items are not copied to billing documents although they are still availablefor evaluation purposes.

310 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 319: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Credit Memo Requests

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 311

Page 320: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Lesson: Returns

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of returns processing.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distributionprocess

� Carry out and explain in detail returns processing

Business Example� Damaged or faulty goods and incorrect invoices result in complaints.� If complaints are made regarding valuable goods, the goods must be

returned. The damaged material must first be checked. It is stored in aspecial area for this purpose.

� If the complaint is justified, the customers receive a credit memo. It must beensured here that the correct amount is credited to the customer account.

� Before a credit memo is issued, it must be approved by an authorized person.

Returns

Figure 117: Returns Processing

312 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 321: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Returns

Returns can be created with reference to a billing document or a sales order. In thisway, the system receives all the required data about, for example, quantities andprice agreements from the original document, thereby ensuring that the correctdocument is processed further.

For evaluation purposes, you must enter an order reason.

Returns processing requires that an approval step is carried out, which isimplemented by an automatic billing block.

When the damaged/defective goods arrive at your warehouse, post the goodsreceipt on the basis of a returns delivery. It is usually posted to a separate returnsstock rather than to the unrestricted-use stock. This posting can be made before orafter the credit memo has been created.

Once the returns have been approved (that is, the billing block has been removed),the credit memo and the required accounting documents are generated as aresult of the billing process. The correct amount is automatically credited to thecustomer account. This step can be carried out independently of the inbounddelivery of the damaged/defective goods.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 313

Page 322: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Carry out and explain in detail returns processing

314 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 323: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the function of an invoice correction request.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distributionprocess

� Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail� Cancel a billing document

Business Example� Damaged or faulty goods and incorrect invoices result in complaints.� If the billing document contains mistakes, the appropriate corrections must

be made.

Invoice Correction Requests

Figure 118: Processing Invoice Corrections

The invoice correction is used to correct quantities or values for which thecustomer has already been billed. An invoice correction request is always createdwith reference to the incorrect billing document.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 315

Page 324: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

The customer receives a document containing the following information: thequantity and price that were originally calculated, the correct quantity and price,and the amount credited to or debited from the customer account.

Figure 119: Invoice Correction Procedure

In the invoice correction request, a credit/debit memo item is generated for eachitem on the incorrect billing document. When processing begins, therefore, thenet value of the document is zero. All the credit memo items are listed in thedocument followed by the debit memo items.

Changes can only be made to the debit memo items. The net values to be creditedare derived from the difference between the credit and debit memo items.

Credit/debit memo items are always deleted in pairs. Item pairs that have notbeen changed can be deleted.

316 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 325: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Canceling a Billing Document

Figure 120: Canceling a Billing Document

A billing document may have to be canceled, for example, if the payment termsor address of the payer have changed.

In this case, a separate billing document (cancellation billing document) and anew accounting document are generated. This revises all the postings made as aresult of the incorrect billing document by reposting each posting item with theopposite symbol.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 317

Page 326: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

318 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 327: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Exercise 13: Complaints Processing

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Process returns and credit memos

Business ExampleA customer buys headlights from you. After the headlights have been deliveredto the customer and he has paid, the customer sends a complaint to say that oneof the headlights does not work. You agree with the customer that he will begiven credit for the amount he has already paid. The customer then makes anothercomplaint about another headlight. You ask him to send the headlight back sothat you can check it.

Task 1:You sell headlights. Create the sales order, outbound delivery and billingdocument for this.

1. Create a standard order for the following customer purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 9-111Requested delivery date: in 10 daysMaterial QuantityT-AS1## 10

Save the order and write down the document number.

___________________________________

2. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order.

Save the delivery and record the document number.

___________________________________

3. Pick the delivery and post thegoods issue.

Create a transfer request as a basis for goods movement in the warehouseand to print the picking list. Enter the transfer request for the outbounddelivery from the previous task:

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 319

Page 328: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Warehouse Number 010

Plant 1000

Foreground/Backgrnd Background

Adopt pick.quantity 2 (include pick. quantities in delivery and post GI)

Record the transfer order number.

___________________________________

4. Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previoustask: Save the billing document and write down the document number.

___________________________________

Task 2:After the customer has received the materials and has paid, he realizes that oneof the headlights is defective. You determine that this damage occurred duringtransportation. You agree with the customer that he can keep the headlight andwill be credited with the amount paid. You carry out credit memo processing.

1. Create a credit memo request (order type CR) with reference to thestandard order you created in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight.

Hint: You enter a credit memo request with the same transaction asa sales order. Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then chooseSelection list, change the quantity to 1, and choose Copy.

2. On the Sales tab page, enter Damaged in transit as the order reason.

3. Save the credit memo request and record the document number.

___________________________________

Task 3:The credit memo request is checked and approved by the person responsible.

1. Release the credit memo request for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the credit memo request and remove the billing blockon the Sales or Item overview tab page by choosing Blank fromthe F4 input help.

Continued on next page

320 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 329: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Task 4:Once the credit memo request has been released, it can be billed and the creditmemo can be created.

1. Create the credit memo for the credit memo request.

Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as forcreating billing documents.

2. Save the credit memo and record the document number.

___________________________________

Task 5:The customer later makes a further complaint saying that another headlightis defective. This time, you want the customer to return the headlight so thatthe damage can be inspected. You agree with the customer that he sends theheadlight back and that he will be credited with the amount paid. Carry outreturns processing.

1. Create a return (order type RE) with reference to the standard order youcreated in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight.

Hint: You enter returns with the same transaction as a sales order.Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then choose Selection listand change the quantity to 1 unit.

2. On the Sales tab page, enter Returns as the order reason.

3. Save the returns and record the document number.

___________________________________

Task 6:The defective headlight has arrived. Process the delivery and the goods receipt.

1. Create the returns delivery document for the headlight.

Hint: To create a returns delivery document, choose Logistics→Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ OutboundDelivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Reference to SalesOrder. Use shipping point Z0##.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 321

Page 330: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

2. Post the goods receipt and make a note of the number of the returns deliverydocument.

____________________________

Hint: The goods receipt is posted in the Create/Change Deliverytransaction. Choose Post Goods Receipt.

3. Check the stock overview for the headlight in plant 1000 to ensure that theone item in question is located in a separate stock for returns.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materialsmanagement. Choose Logistics→ Materials Management→Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.Choose plant 1000.

Task 7:The returns are checked and approved by the person responsible.

1. Release the returns for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the returns and remove the billing block on the Salesor Item overview tab page by choosing Blank from the F4 input help.

Task 8:Once the returns have been released, they can be billed and the credit memo forreturns can be created.

1. Create the credit memo for returns for the returned goods.

Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as forcreating billing documents.

2. Save the credit memo for returns and record the document number.

___________________________________

Task 9:Questions about returns and credit memo processing

1. Can you create a delivery document for a credit memo request?

___________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

322 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 331: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

2. Do you have to create a credit memo request or a returns document withreference to a sales order or billing document?

___________________________________________________________

3. Why would you create a credit memo request or returns document withreference to a sales order?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

4. Which document would you create if the billing document contains adifferent quantity or price?

___________________________________________________________

5. Can an invoice correction request also be created with reference to a salesorder?

___________________________________________________________

6. Why do you have to enter an order reason for returns or credit/debit memorequests?

___________________________________________________________

7. Before a credit memo can be created as a result of billing, an approval stepmay be necessary for the credit memo request. What field is used here?

___________________________________________________________

8. Once you have created a billing document, you find out the address of thepayer has changed. What can you do to change the address and carry outbilling again?

___________________________________________________________

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 323

Page 332: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Solution 13: Complaints ProcessingTask 1:You sell headlights. Create the sales order, outbound delivery and billingdocument for this.

1. Create a standard order for the following customer purchase order.

Purchase orderCustomer: T-S50A##Purchase order number: 9-111Requested delivery date: in 10 daysMaterial QuantityT-AS1## 10

Save the order and write down the document number.

___________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

2. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order.

Save the delivery and record the document number.

___________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

To be able to enter the outbound delivery at an earlier date, set theselection date 20 days into the future. Use shipping point Z0##.

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

3. Pick the delivery and post thegoods issue.

Create a transfer request as a basis for goods movement in the warehouseand to print the picking list. Enter the transfer request for the outbounddelivery from the previous task:

Continued on next page

324 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 333: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Warehouse Number 010

Plant 1000

Foreground/Backgrnd Background

Adopt pick.quantity 2 (include pick. quantities in delivery and post GI)

Record the transfer order number.

___________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Picking→ Create Transfer Order→ Single Document

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

4. Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previoustask: Save the billing document and write down the document number.

___________________________________

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Create

Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 325

Page 334: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Task 2:After the customer has received the materials and has paid, he realizes that oneof the headlights is defective. You determine that this damage occurred duringtransportation. You agree with the customer that he can keep the headlight andwill be credited with the amount paid. You carry out credit memo processing.

1. Create a credit memo request (order type CR) with reference to thestandard order you created in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight.

Hint: You enter a credit memo request with the same transaction asa sales order. Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then chooseSelection list, change the quantity to 1, and choose Copy.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Order type Credit memo request.

Choose Create with Reference.

Choose the Order tab page and enter the order number.

Choose Selection list.

Change the open quantity to 1 unit.

Choose Copy.

2. On the Sales tab page, enter Damaged in transit as the order reason.

a) Choose the Sales tab page and enter Damaged in transit in theOrder reason field.

3. Save the credit memo request and record the document number.

___________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

326 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 335: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Task 3:The credit memo request is checked and approved by the person responsible.

1. Release the credit memo request for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the credit memo request and remove the billing blockon the Sales or Item overview tab page by choosing Blank fromthe F4 input help.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Change

Choose the Sales or Item overview tab page and choose Blank fromthe F4 input help for the Billing block field.

Task 4:Once the credit memo request has been released, it can be billed and the creditmemo can be created.

1. Create the credit memo for the credit memo request.

Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as forcreating billing documents.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Create

2. Save the credit memo and record the document number.

___________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 327

Page 336: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Task 5:The customer later makes a further complaint saying that another headlightis defective. This time, you want the customer to return the headlight so thatthe damage can be inspected. You agree with the customer that he sends theheadlight back and that he will be credited with the amount paid. Carry outreturns processing.

1. Create a return (order type RE) with reference to the standard order youcreated in the first exercise of this unit for a headlight.

Hint: You enter returns with the same transaction as a sales order.Choose Create with Reference to Order. Then choose Selection listand change the quantity to 1 unit.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Create

Order type Returns

Choose Create with Reference.

Choose the Order tab page and enter the order number.

Choose Selection list.

Change the open quantity to 1 unit.

Choose Copy.

2. On the Sales tab page, enter Returns as the order reason.

a) Choose the Sales tab page and enter Returns in the Order reasonfield.

3. Save the returns and record the document number.

___________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Continued on next page

328 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 337: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Task 6:The defective headlight has arrived. Process the delivery and the goods receipt.

1. Create the returns delivery document for the headlight.

Hint: To create a returns delivery document, choose Logistics→Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→ OutboundDelivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Reference to SalesOrder. Use shipping point Z0##.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Shipping and Transportation→Outbound Delivery→ Create→ Single Document→ With Referenceto Sales Order

In the Order field, enter the Number of returns.

2. Post the goods receipt and make a note of the number of the returns deliverydocument.

____________________________

Hint: The goods receipt is posted in the Create/Change Deliverytransaction. Choose Post Goods Receipt.

a) Choose Post Goods Receipt.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

3. Check the stock overview for the headlight in plant 1000 to ensure that theone item in question is located in a separate stock for returns.

Hint: Inventory management is carried out in materialsmanagement. Choose Logistics→ Materials Management→Inventory Management→ Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.Choose plant 1000.

a) Logistics→ Materials Management→ Inventory Management→Environment→ Stock→ Stock Overview.

Choose plant 1000. 1 unit is located in the returns stock.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 329

Page 338: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

Task 7:The returns are checked and approved by the person responsible.

1. Release the returns for billing by removing the billing block.

Hint: Change the returns and remove the billing block on the Salesor Item overview tab page by choosing Blank from the F4 input help.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Order→ Change

Choose the Sales or Item overview tab page and choose Blank fromthe F4 input help for the Billing block field.

Task 8:Once the returns have been released, they can be billed and the credit memo forreturns can be created.

1. Create the credit memo for returns for the returned goods.

Hint: To create credit memos, use the same transaction as forcreating billing documents.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Billing→ Billing Document→ Create

2. Save the credit memo for returns and record the document number.

___________________________________

a) Choose Save.

The document number is assigned internally by the system.

Task 9:Questions about returns and credit memo processing

1. Can you create a delivery document for a credit memo request?

___________________________________________________________

a) No. In credit memo processing, no deliveries or goods movementsoccur.

2. Do you have to create a credit memo request or a returns document withreference to a sales order or billing document?

Continued on next page

330 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 339: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

___________________________________________________________

a) No. A credit memo request or returns document can also be createdwithout reference to another document.

3. Why would you create a credit memo request or returns document withreference to a sales order?

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

a) If create a credit memo request or returns document with reference to asales order, the system receives all the required data (customer data,material data, quantity, and price) from the original document.

4. Which document would you create if the billing document contains adifferent quantity or price?

___________________________________________________________

a) An invoice correction request is used for correcting quantities or othervalues in billing documents.

5. Can an invoice correction request also be created with reference to a salesorder?

___________________________________________________________

a) No. An invoice correction request is always created with reference to abilling document.

6. Why do you have to enter an order reason for returns or credit/debit memorequests?

___________________________________________________________

a) The order reason is entered so that that causes of complaints can laterbe evaluated.

7. Before a credit memo can be created as a result of billing, an approval stepmay be necessary for the credit memo request. What field is used here?

___________________________________________________________

a) The Billing Block field. The credit memo request is subject to a billingblock, which prevents immediate or automatic billing. Once the creditmemo request has been approved, the billing block can be removedand the document billed.

This step can be avoided, however, by making the appropriateCustomizing setting for the 'credit memo request' document type so thatthe system deactivates the billing block option.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 331

Page 340: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 8: Complaints Processing SCM600

8. Once you have created a billing document, you find out the address of thepayer has changed. What can you do to change the address and carry outbilling again?

___________________________________________________________

a) You can cancel the billing document and carry out billing again,whereby the changes become effective.

332 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 341: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Invoice Correction Requests

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail� Cancel a billing document

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 333

Page 342: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Carry out and explain in detail credit memo processing� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Carry out and explain in detail returns processing� Process a complaint with reference to a previous sales and distribution

process� Use an invoice correction request and explain the process in detail� Cancel a billing document

334 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 343: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9Analyses for Sales and Distribution

Processes

Unit OverviewThis unit looks at the different options available for analyzing sales anddistribution data.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Use list processing to locate and evaluate information� Analyze SD information using the tools available in the Sales Information

System (SIS)� Define the components of information structures� Describe how SAP Business Information Warehouse works

Unit ContentsLesson: Lists and Reports ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

Exercise 14: Lists and Reports .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343Lesson: Sales Information System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

Exercise 15: Sales Information System .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361Lesson: Business Information Warehouse ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 335

Page 344: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Lesson: Lists and Reports

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains list evaluation options.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Use list processing to locate and evaluate information

Business Example� IDES, Inc. reviews all areas of its business to identify opportunities to reduce

costs and improve efficiency.� In order to ensure efficient sales order processing, open operations must be

identified quickly and detailed information from documents has to be listedspecifically.

Lists and Reports

Figure 121: Sources of SD Information

The Sales Information System (SIS) belongs to Sales and Distribution. With SIS,you can compress data from sales documents to obtain information which willhelp you make strategic business decisions. SIS contains standard analyses as wellas flexible analyses to help you evaluate statistical data.

336 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 345: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

SAP provides list functions to create worklists in sales, delivery, picking, andbilling.

The Logistics Information Library allows you to integrate standard and flexibleanalyses as well as your own reports. You can structure and enhance theinformation library as you require.

In case the standard reports do not fulfill your requirements, you can use ABAPqueries to extract information from the database into a report.

Figure 122: Lists and Reports

The system provides lists to support the entire sales order management cycle.

Lists fall into two categories.

� Online lists:

Online lists display, for example, sales, delivery, or billing documents for acustomer, a material, or a combination of both.

Other online lists display documents with a status that requires processing.

� Worklists:

(for instance, all documents that are blocked for delivery)

Worklists allow you to select certain tasks in sales and distribution and toprocess them afterwards. You select the tasks according to your area ofresponsibility and to various selection criteria (such as date, organizationalelement, or customer).

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 337

Page 346: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Figure 123: Example: List of Orders

Enter the information you want to use to restrict the options, on the selectionscreen. The system then displays a list of the relevant documents.

You can edit the list further by:

� Using filter, sort, and sum up functions� Adding or deleting additional fields (columns)

From the list, you can also:

� Display or change a sales order and return to the list� Display status information (overall status, delivery status, and so on) for

each document

338 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 347: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

Figure 124: Example: Documents with a Specific Status

You can display document lists using the date and some additional selectioncriteria. For example, you can:

� Display lists of the inquiries or quotations which are to be processed by aspecified point in time

� Display lists of all sales orders that still have to be delivered� Display lists of the incomplete sales and distribution documents in which

important information for the subsequent process steps is missing

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 339

Page 348: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Figure 125: Processing Worklists

The system provides tools that you can use to process different worklists.

In the first step, you use specific criteria (for instance, date, responsibleorganizational unit, and so on) to select from all documents that need to beprocessed. By doing this, you can organize the organize the work to meet yourbusiness requirements.

In the second step, the system processes this worklist. Tasks from variousreference documents can be grouped together appropriately and multiple tasksfrom a previous document can be split into several documents.

The Delivery Due List and Billing Due List are just two examples of worklists.

340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 349: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

Figure 126: Document Flow

The document flow is another online list function. It displays the history ofrelated documents.

Document flow tracks the progress of a sales order in order to respond to customerinquiries. It shows all documents associated with the sales order.

You can select a document to display it and then return to the document flow.

You can also display the status of the entire document and of each line item.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 341

Page 350: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

342 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 351: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

Exercise 14: Lists and Reports

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Use SD analysis tools and adjust them to your requirements� Use lists to organize information on current business processes

Business ExampleIDES, Inc. must ensure that all phases of sales order management are efficientand effective. To do this, they require instant access to lists and online reportingfor customer service, shipping, and invoice processing activities. They also uselists to find important information if, for example, they don�t know the actualdocument number.

Each department has specific lists they use; examples include preparing lists ofsales orders ready for delivery creation, lists of deliveries ready for picking andshipping, lists of shipped outbound deliveries ready for billing, and lists of blockeddocuments requiring special attention.

IDES, Inc. must also answer customer questions regarding quotations, salesorders, outbound deliveries and billing documents.

Task 1:The sales and distribution departments require reporting and analysis for thecurrent SD processes on a monthly basis at document level.

1. Check whether there are any open orders for the material T-AS3## for thecurrent and the past month. Use a suitable list to do this.

Hint: Use the menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→ Orders→ List of Sales Orders

Choose Open sales orders.

2. Display a list of all the orders that have been created for material T-AS1##in the course of this month.

3. Branch to an order and enter the employee Melanie Mayer (personnelnumber 1701) as a sales representative. Return to the list.

Hint: You can branch to an order by double-clicking on the entry.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 343

Page 352: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

4. Choose the display variant Order item.

Hint: Choose Settings→ Layouts→ Choose.

Task 2:Process the list you executed in the last step according to your management�srequirements.

1. Sort the list in ascending order based on sold-to party numbers.

Hint: Select the Sold-to party column and choose Sort in ascendingorder.

2. Restrict the list to standard orders.

Hint: Select the Sales Document Type column and choose Set filter.Restrict the list to sales document to OR.

3. Determine the net value that has been obtained for this material in the givenperiod of time.

Hint: Select the Net value column and choose Add up values.

4. Move the document number column to the left end of the list and delete thepurchasing order column from the list.

Hint: Choose Current (or→ Settings→ Layouts→ Current). Selectthe SD document entry and choose Selected row(s) up one position.Alternatively, you can move the items by using drag and drop.

5. Include the information on order quantity, plant and shipping point at theend of the list.

Hint: Choose Current. Select the last line. Select the relevantentries in the right table, choose Show selected fields then Copy.

6. Display subtotals for each sold-to party.

Hint: Mark the Sold-to party column and choose Subtotal.

Continued on next page

344 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 353: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

7. Optimize the column width.

Hint: Choose→ Settings→ Columns→ Optimize width.

8. Save your processed list as a user-specific display variant with the name:

Layout LO150-## and the description Order list ##.

Hint: Choose→ Settings→ Layouts→ Save.

9. Set your layout as the initial variant.

Hint: Choose→ Settings→ Layouts→ Administration. Select yourvariant and choose Set initial variant and then Save.

10. Return to the list of orders. Send the list to your instructor, and a copy toyourself also, and add a short note to it.

Hint: Choose→ List→ Save→ Office.

As recipient, enter the instructor�s name and your name.

11. Call up the list using your variant and material T-AS2##.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 345

Page 354: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Task 3:Questions on lists and reports

1. List examples of types of standard reports.

2. When would you use the online reporting functions and when would you usethe Sales Information System reports?

3. When you process and display lists, what are some of the key featuresavailable when editing?

4. Name two types of worklists you generated in this course.

5. What is a display variant?

346 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 355: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

Solution 14: Lists and ReportsTask 1:The sales and distribution departments require reporting and analysis for thecurrent SD processes on a monthly basis at document level.

1. Check whether there are any open orders for the material T-AS3## for thecurrent and the past month. Use a suitable list to do this.

Hint: Use the menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→ Orders→ List of Sales Orders

Choose Open sales orders.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→Orders→ List of Sales Orders

Choose Open sales orders.

2. Display a list of all the orders that have been created for material T-AS1##in the course of this month.

a) Enter material number T-AS1##.

3. Branch to an order and enter the employee Melanie Mayer (personnelnumber 1701) as a sales representative. Return to the list.

Hint: You can branch to an order by double-clicking on the entry.

a) Double-click the order.

Choose Display doc. header details.

Choose the Partners tab page.

Partner function: Sales representative

Personnel number: 1701

4. Choose the display variant Order item.

Hint: Choose Settings→ Layouts→ Choose.

a) Settings→ Layouts→ Choose

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 347

Page 356: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Task 2:Process the list you executed in the last step according to your management�srequirements.

1. Sort the list in ascending order based on sold-to party numbers.

Hint: Select the Sold-to party column and choose Sort in ascendingorder.

a) Select the Sold-to party column.

Choose Sort in ascending order.

2. Restrict the list to standard orders.

Hint: Select the Sales Document Type column and choose Set filter.Restrict the list to sales document to OR.

a) Select the Sales Document Type column.

Choose Set filter. Enter the sales document type OR.

3. Determine the net value that has been obtained for this material in the givenperiod of time.

Hint: Select the Net value column and choose Add up values.

a) Select the Net value column.

Choose Add up values.

4. Move the document number column to the left end of the list and delete thepurchasing order column from the list.

Hint: Choose Current (or→ Settings→ Layouts→ Current). Selectthe SD document entry and choose Selected row(s) up one position.Alternatively, you can move the items by using drag and drop.

a) Choose Current.

Select the Sales Document Type entry.

Choose Selected row(s) up one position several times.

Continued on next page

348 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 357: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

5. Include the information on order quantity, plant and shipping point at theend of the list.

Hint: Choose Current. Select the last line. Select the relevantentries in the right table, choose Show selected fields then Copy.

a) Choose Current.

Select the last line.

Select the relevant entries in the table on the right-hand side.

Select Show selected fields and then Copy.

6. Display subtotals for each sold-to party.

Hint: Mark the Sold-to party column and choose Subtotal.

a) Select the Sold-to party column.

Choose Subtotal.

7. Optimize the column width.

Hint: Choose→ Settings→ Columns→ Optimize width.

a) Choose→ Settings→ Columns→ Optimize width.

8. Save your processed list as a user-specific display variant with the name:

Layout LO150-## and the description Order list ##.

Hint: Choose→ Settings→ Layouts→ Save.

a) Choose→ Settings→ Layouts.

Select the User-specific field.

→ Save.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 349

Page 358: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

9. Set your layout as the initial variant.

Hint: Choose→ Settings→ Layouts→ Administration. Select yourvariant and choose Set initial variant and then Save.

a) Choose Settings→ Layouts→ Administration.

Select your layout.

Choose Default setting.

10. Return to the list of orders. Send the list to your instructor, and a copy toyourself also, and add a short note to it.

Hint: Choose→ List→ Save→ Office.

As recipient, enter the instructor�s name and your name.

a) Choose List→ Save→ Office.

11. Call up the list using your variant and material T-AS2##.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales→ Information System→Orders→ List of Sales Orders.

The list is called with your display variant.

Task 3:Questions on lists and reports

1. List examples of types of standard reports.

Answer: List of orders, quotations, inquiries, outbound deliveries, billingdocuments, list of incomplete documents, list of blocked documents, and soon.

2. When would you use the online reporting functions and when would you usethe Sales Information System reports?

Answer: Online reporting functions show you lists of transactions to enableyou to access the documents or process the documents further. You use theselists in your day-to-day processing.The Sales Information System allows you to analyze results across severalbusiness transactions. You can, for example, compare data for differentperiods and key figures. Management uses the SIS to generate detailedreports. This data can be used for further planning and development of newor improved sales strategies.

Continued on next page

350 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 359: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Lists and Reports

3. When you process and display lists, what are some of the key featuresavailable when editing?

Answer: You can filter (restrict), sort, total and subtotal data. You can alsoadd and delete fields on a list.

4. Name two types of worklists you generated in this course.

Answer: Delivery Due List and Billing Due List

5. What is a display variant?

Answer: A variant is a variation of a report that is either delivered with theR/3 System or that you created and saved. Each variant contains differentfields that are populated with data every time you call up the report.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 351

Page 360: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Use list processing to locate and evaluate information

352 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 361: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Lesson: Sales Information System

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains how to carry out strategic analyses using the SalesInformation System.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Analyze SD information using the tools available in the Sales InformationSystem (SIS)

� Define the components of information structures

Business Example� The sales order management team must respond to IDES, Inc. management

requests for reports on key performance figures and transactions.

Sales Information System

Figure 127: Information Sources in the System

The system allows you to analyze data from different corporate perspectives.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 353

Page 362: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Decision makers can carry out multi-level analyses on data specific to oneapplication or a variety of applications.

The Logistics Information System (LIS) is used to review and analyze key figuresthroughout the entire Logistics area in the system.

Figure 128: Logistics Information System

In the area of LIS, a series of application-specific information systems areavailable which have a standardized interface and similar basic functionality.

The following information systems are available in Logistics:

� SIS Sales Information System� PURCHIS Purchasing Information System� INVCO Inventory Controlling� TIS Transportation Information System� SFIS Shop Floor Information System� QMIS Quality Management Information System� PMIS Plant Maintenance Information System

354 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 363: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Figure 129: Data Warehouse Concepts

When you use the transactions in the Logistics applications, LIS-relevant data isupdated. You can also update data from other systems in LIS.

LIS aggregates and stores this data in the data warehouse. The data can beaggregated with regard to quality or quantity:

� Quantitative reduction by aggregation at period level� Qualitative reduction by the selection of key figures

To analyze the aggregate data, you can use the SIS tools. Aggregation improvesresponse times and the quality of the resulting reports.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 355

Page 364: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Figure 130: Composition of Information Structures

The Sales Information System is based on information structures. These arespecial statistical tables that contain data from processes carried out by thedifferent applications. This data is constantly collected and updated by the system.

Information structures comprise three basic types of information:

� Characteristics are criteria that you specify to collect data on a certainsubject.

In SD, you generally require sales information about sales organizations,sales offices, customers, and materials.

� A period unit is also a criterion used in information structures. You canupdate data for a particular period (a day, week, month, or a posting period,for example).

� Key figures are metric for services rendered. They provide key corporateinformation regarding a particular characteristic. In SD, for example,incoming orders, sales, and returns are of key importance.

356 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 365: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Figure 131: Information Structures in SD

The standard system contains a variety of information structures for SD (S001 toS006, for example). You can use the standard analyses to evaluate data withouthaving to make additional settings in Customizing.

The standard system also contains information structures for internal use. Theseinclude information structures for credit management, rebate processing, salessupport, or contract processing.

You can also create your own information structures in Customizing in the namerange S501 to S999.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 357

Page 366: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Figure 132: Standard Analyses

Standard analyses offer a wide range of functions for creating complex databasepresentations and analyses in the LIS.

The analysis is based on the information structures. First, select the required datascope depending on the characteristics and period of the information structure.This data is first displayed in a basic list, which can be drilled down to displaydifferent characteristics. All analyses can be archived.

You can also call up standard transactions from the current evaluation to display,for example, master data or document information.

A variety of tools are available that allow you to analyze the selected data furtherand present your results. These include, for example, cumulative curves, ABCanalyses, time series, correlations, top-n evaluations, and other comparisonoptions.

You can then display this data graphically.

The evaluation results can also be:

� Printed� Downloaded as a file to your local PC� Downloaded to a spreadsheet program� Sent to one or more employees via your system's office component

358 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 367: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Figure 133: Flexible Analyses

Flexible analyses in LIS allow you to determine which data in which format iscombined to create an individual report.

To do so, use the menu to define the format and content of your required list. Atthe touch of a button, the program is generated in the background. The resultinglist offers a variety of options for interactive online processing.

This procedure offers additional functions:

� You can combine characteristics and key figures from different informationstructures in one list.

� You can generate new key figures that can be calculated according toseparate formulas on the basis of the existing key figures.

� You can choose between different layout variants.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 359

Page 368: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

360 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 369: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Exercise 15: Sales Information System

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:� Carry out cross-document analysis of sales and distribution processes� Carry out periodic evaluations using the tools of the Sales Information

System� Use the tools for standard analyses

Business ExampleThe management of IDES, Inc. requests analysis reports to analyze buyingpatterns, and to review the amount of business with each customer. On this basis,the production requirements can be planned. The project team has requested theability to respond accurately and quickly to these requirements.

IDES, Inc. reviews the overall performance of the SD department by analyzingthe sales patterns within each sales organization. IDES, Inc. is primarily interestedin viewing the total value of incoming orders and the sales orders by customer.For planning and budgeting, IDES, Inc. analyzes the value of sales by divisionsand the value of sales by customer and material.

As a member of the SD project team, you will verify that the system can meet therequirements of the IDES, Inc. management. You will run standard analyses usingthe Sales Information System and test the various reporting functions.

Task 1:Selection for a standard analysis

1. Review the customer sales history for this month by performing a standardcustomer analysis for all customers in sales organization 1000 anddistribution channel 12.

Make sure that the entry field Division is blank.

Hint: Save your analysis as selection version KA-##. ChooseLogistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales Information System→Standard analyses→ Customer.

You can store your selected data in a selection version for furtheranalysis.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 361

Page 370: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Task 2:Carry out your customer analysis.

1. Change the settings in order to display the customer number and thecustomer name.

Hint: Choose Settings → Characteristic display→ Key anddescription.

2. Note down the value of the incoming orders for customer T-S50A##. Donot leave the analysis.

Incoming orders T-S50A##: ______________________________

Task 3:Characteristics and standard drilldown

1. Drill down the analysis to the bottom level. Note down the criteria by whichanalysis is carried out.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Hint: In order to reach the next level of the drilldown, place thecursor on a characteristic in the left-hand column and choose Detail.

2. Compare the sequence recorded above with the standard drilldown for thisanalysis.

Hint: Choose Extras→ Display standard drilldown.

Continued on next page

362 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 371: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Task 4:Key figures

Return to the Initial List screen.

1. Display a list of all possible key figures for your customer T-S50A##. Notedown two key figures with values that are not included in your display (forexample, costs for incoming orders and sales volume).

___________________: _________________________

___________________: _________________________

Hint: Place the cursor on a value for a customer key figure forwhich you need the relevant information. Choose Extras→ AllKey Figures.

(or double-click the key figure)

2. Add the key figures Incoming orders quantity and Invoiced quantity toyour standard analysis. They are important for your analyses. Note down thenumber of billed units for your customer.

Invoiced quantity: _________________________

Hint: Select Choose key figures.

To add new key figures, you use the same process that you used toadd fields to list displays in the previous topic.

Task 5:Evaluations on standard analysis

1. Compare the two key figures Sales and Invoiced Sales: Cost. Note downthe totals for these two values and the percentage difference from both keyfigures.

Sales: ____________________________________________

Invoiced Sales: Cost: ____________________________________________

%: ______________________________________________

Hint: Select the Sales field.

Choose Edit→ Comparisons→ Two key figures→ Sales

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 363

Page 372: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

2. Close the comparison. Change the display to show the data by material.

Hint: Choose Switch Drilldown ... → Material

3. Create a Top 3 list of your materials by Sales; display the results aspercentages and using a graphic.

Hint: Choose Top N→ 3→ Settings→ Value display→ Percent.

Task 6:Material analysis

1. Generate a material analysis for your materials in sales organization 1000and distribution channel 12.

Hint: Use the menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales Information System→Standard Analyses→ Material

To select your materials, you can use the multiple selection screenand then the search term <k>, old material number ##LO150*.

2. Execute an ABC analysis for sales. Choose the following restriction

A segment: 50% of sales

B segment: 30% of sales

C segment: 20% of sales

Hint: Choose Edit→ ABC analysis→ Total invoiced sales (%)

3. Display the overview of segments, return to the graphic and then displaythe total list.

Hint: Choose Overview of segments.

Choose Complete list.

4. Display the results as a cumulative frequency curve.

Hint: Choose Goto→ Cumulative curve

Continued on next page

364 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 373: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Task 7:Questions on the Sales Information System

1. What is the purpose of an information system?

2. What three kinds of information comprise an information structure?

3. Explain the term characteristic.

4. Explain the term key figure.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 365

Page 374: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Solution 15: Sales Information SystemTask 1:Selection for a standard analysis

1. Review the customer sales history for this month by performing a standardcustomer analysis for all customers in sales organization 1000 anddistribution channel 12.

Make sure that the entry field Division is blank.

Hint: Save your analysis as selection version KA-##. ChooseLogistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales Information System→Standard analyses→ Customer.

You can store your selected data in a selection version for furtheranalysis.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales Information System→Standard analyses→ Customer

Enter sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12. Execute theanalysis and save.

Task 2:Carry out your customer analysis.

1. Change the settings in order to display the customer number and thecustomer name.

Hint: Choose Settings → Characteristic display→ Key anddescription.

a) Settings→ Characteristic display→ Key and description

2. Note down the value of the incoming orders for customer T-S50A##. Donot leave the analysis.

Incoming orders T-S50A##: ______________________________

a) The values are in the Total line and the Incoming orders column

Continued on next page

366 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 375: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Task 3:Characteristics and standard drilldown

1. Drill down the analysis to the bottom level. Note down the criteria by whichanalysis is carried out.

1. Sold-to party2. Period3. Sales organization4. Distribution channel5. Division6. Material

Hint: In order to reach the next level of the drilldown, place thecursor on a characteristic in the left-hand column and choose Detail.

a)

2. Compare the sequence recorded above with the standard drilldown for thisanalysis.

Hint: Choose Extras→ Display standard drilldown.

a) Extras→ Display standard drilldown

The drilldown corresponds to the standard drilldown.

Task 4:Key figures

Return to the Initial List screen.

1. Display a list of all possible key figures for your customer T-S50A##. Notedown two key figures with values that are not included in your display (forexample, costs for incoming orders and sales volume).

___________________: _________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 367

Page 376: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

___________________: _________________________

Hint: Place the cursor on a value for a customer key figure forwhich you need the relevant information. Choose Extras→ AllKey Figures.

(or double-click the key figure)

a) Place the cursor on the value for a key figure of the customer.

→ Extras→ All Key Figures

(or double-click the key figure)

2. Add the key figures Incoming orders quantity and Invoiced quantity toyour standard analysis. They are important for your analyses. Note down thenumber of billed units for your customer.

Invoiced quantity: _________________________

Hint: Select Choose key figures.

To add new key figures, you use the same process that you used toadd fields to list displays in the previous topic.

a) Select Choose key figures (key figures are added in a similar manneras with lists).

Task 5:Evaluations on standard analysis

1. Compare the two key figures Sales and Invoiced Sales: Cost. Note downthe totals for these two values and the percentage difference from both keyfigures.

Sales: ____________________________________________

Invoiced Sales: Cost: ____________________________________________

%: ______________________________________________

Hint: Select the Sales field.

Choose Edit→ Comparisons→ Two key figures→ Sales

a) Select the Sales field.

Edit→ Comparisons→ Two key figures→ Sales

Continued on next page

368 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 377: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

2. Close the comparison. Change the display to show the data by material.

Hint: Choose Switch Drilldown ... → Material

a) Choose Switch drilldown→ Material

3. Create a Top 3 list of your materials by Sales; display the results aspercentages and using a graphic.

Hint: Choose Top N→ 3→ Settings→ Value display→ Percent.

a) Choose Top N→ 3→ Settings→ Value display→ Percent.

Choose graphic.

Task 6:Material analysis

1. Generate a material analysis for your materials in sales organization 1000and distribution channel 12.

Hint: Use the menu path:

Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales Information System→Standard Analyses→ Material

To select your materials, you can use the multiple selection screenand then the search term <k>, old material number ##LO150*.

a) Logistics→ Sales and Distribution→ Sales Information System→Standard Analyses→ Material

2. Execute an ABC analysis for sales. Choose the following restriction

A segment: 50% of sales

B segment: 30% of sales

C segment: 20% of sales

Hint: Choose Edit→ ABC analysis→ Total invoiced sales (%)

a) Edit→ ABC analysis→ Total invoiced sales (%)

Continued on next page

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 369

Page 378: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

3. Display the overview of segments, return to the graphic and then displaythe total list.

Hint: Choose Overview of segments.

Choose Complete list.

a) Choose Overview of segments.

Choose Complete list.

4. Display the results as a cumulative frequency curve.

Hint: Choose Goto→ Cumulative curve

a) Goto→ Cumulative curve

Task 7:Questions on the Sales Information System

1. What is the purpose of an information system?

Answer: An information system allows you to compress data effectively.This results in specific analyses and reports for the multiple tasks of thevarious management levels. Using the information reports and analyses, youcan manage results effectively and identify problems quickly (for instance,when threshold values are exceeded). On the basis of these reports andanalyses, further planning can be carried out and new strategies may bedeveloped.

2. What three kinds of information comprise an information structure?

Answer: Characteristics, key figures, and period

3. Explain the term characteristic.

Answer: Characteristics are what you are analyzing. The system compressesinformation from sales and distribution documents in the Data Warehousebased on these values.Examples: sales organization ,distribution channel, customer or material.

4. Explain the term key figure.

Answer: Key figures are performance measures or statistics that have aspecial significance in your business.Examples: incoming orders or sales volume.

370 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 379: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Sales Information System

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Analyze SD information using the tools available in the Sales Information

System (SIS)� Define the components of information structures

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 371

Page 380: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

Lesson: Business Information Warehouse

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains how SAP Business Information Warehouse can be used forsales and distribution analyses.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe how SAP Business Information Warehouse works

Business Example� You want to find out more about SAP Business Information Warehouse

Business Information Warehouse

Figure 134: SAP BW Architecture

This slide provides an overview of the architecture of SAP Business InformationWarehouse in a heterogeneous system landscape. The lower level contains thesource systems, which include mySAP.com components such as SAP R/3 systems,SAP Business Information Warehouses, SAP Customer Relationship Managementsystems, or external systems such as non-SAP systems or files.

372 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 381: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Business Information Warehouse

The central administration area of the SAP BW contains a stagingengine and databases. The staging area controls the loading andprocessing of data and prepares the data for subsequent processes.The SAP BW databases store not only master data but also metadata.The Administrator Workbench is responsible for the organization of data in SAPBW as well as for the control, monitoring, and maintenance of all data retrievalprocesses.

The Business Explorer and its reporting tools are on the third level. These toolsallow you to carry out simultaneous Microsoft Excel and Web-based analysesaccording to different dimensions, such as time, location and product.

As Business Framework components, source systems and Business InformationWarehouse communicate via BAPIs (Business Application ProgrammingInterfaces). SAP provides extraction mechanisms for production data with whichdata from mySAP.com components can be prepared to be extracted to BusinessInformation Warehouse. With SAP-external source systems, the BW BAPIinterface allows you to use third-party extraction tools to prepare and extractthe data.

Figure 135: Operative/Informative Environment

This diagram highlights the following:SAP Business Information Warehouse allows you to view thetransaction-oriented OLTP and the analysis-oriented OLAP environment together.The business process data yields an enormous amount of information that cannotbe easily used for targeted analyses. For this reason, the data is first cleanedand, due to its different origins, prepared with regard to technical and semantic

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 373

Page 382: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 9: Analyses for Sales and Distribution Processes SCM600

aspects (homogenized). The resulting analyses provide knowledge that helpsthe company management team to define their corporate strategy and resultingbusiness processes.

Figure 136: Business Content Development

The Business Content contains many different objects that make it easier toimplement SAP BW and set up an effective reporting function. These include:

� All the required technical and content-related prerequisites for integratingSAP and non-SAP systems, which reduces the implementation outlay.

� Work groups are held in which the Business Content is constantly extendedby SAP in close collaboration with customers.

� Predefined analyses and reports can be used in the projects.

The Business Content is structured according to applications and is, therefore,ideal for the mySAP Business Suite solutions.

374 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 383: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Business Information Warehouse

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe how SAP Business Information Warehouse works

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 375

Page 384: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Use list processing to locate and evaluate information� Analyze SD information using the tools available in the Sales Information

System (SIS)� Define the components of information structures� Describe how SAP Business Information Warehouse works

376 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 385: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 10Integrating SAP ECC and SAP CRM

Unit OverviewThis unit explains the function of the mySAP CRM solution in the sales anddistribution environment.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Explain the function ofmySAP CRM in the sales and distribution environment

Unit ContentsLesson: Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales and DistributionEnvironment .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 377

Page 386: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 10: Integrating SAP ECC and SAP CRM SCM600

Lesson: Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales andDistribution Environment

Lesson OverviewThis lesson explains the function of mySAP CRM and how it can be used forsales and distribution processes.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Explain the function ofmySAP CRM in the sales and distribution environment

Business ExampleThe project team wants to find out about the function of mySAP CRM.

Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales and DistributionEnvironment

Figure 137: What is CRM?

Customer Relationship Management has become a crucial factor for the successof a business. The customer is of central importance to the company and itsbusiness processes.

378 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 387: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales and Distribution Environment

The goal of CRM is to establish, retain and improve long-term relationships withcustomers.

Figure 138: Traditional direct sales

Traditional direct sales is characterized by decentralized information on customers.In some cases, only one employee has knowledge of the customer and contactinformation.

This information is not typically used collectively within the organization.

If information is forwarded, it is often limited and incorrect. Employeefluctuations mean that valuable customer information is often lost.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 379

Page 388: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 10: Integrating SAP ECC and SAP CRM SCM600

Figure 139: Direct sales today using CRM

Every employee who requires information on customer contacts can now useCRM to obtain immediate access to all contact information.

By analyzing information, a company obtains broad knowledge of customers.This enables a company to improve the services they offer, process inquiries morequickly, develop relationships and promote stronger customer loyalty.

380 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 389: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales and Distribution Environment

Figure 140: mySAP CRM as Part of mySAP Business Suite

mySAP Business Suite comprises different applications as well as application andintegration platforms. It enables companies to manage their entire value chainright across their corporate network, thereby ensuring greater flexibility.

mySAP Business Suite comprises the following SAP solutions:

� mySAP CRM (Customer Relationship Management)� mySAP SCM (Supply Chain Management)� mySAP PLM (Product Lifecycle Management)� mySAP ERP Human Capital Management� mySAP ERP Financials� SAP Solutions for Mobile Business� SAP NetWeaver

The mySAP CRM solution supports marketing, sales/distribution, and serviceprocesses across all contact channels and supplies accurate analyses that can beused for decision-making purposes.

mySAP CRM is a best-of-breed solution that allows you to optimize customerrelations across all phases, from customer acquisition through sales via allavailable distribution and interaction channels to customer service.

mySAP CRM is based on the SAP NetWeaver technology platform, which meansthat it can be seamlessly integrated into your existing IT landscape right fromthe start.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 381

Page 390: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 10: Integrating SAP ECC and SAP CRM SCM600

Figure 141: Corporate Departments with Customer Contact

The mySAP CRM solution is divided into the following key function areas: Sales,Service, Marketing, and Analytics. This ensures that all the departments in yourcompany that are in contact with customers have the best possible technologyat their disposal.

The key area of Sales allows you to structure sales and distribution processessystematically, from the inquiry and quotation phases through to the orderand invoicing phases. It also helps you organize and structure your sales anddistribution areas and systematically keep track of sales opportunities.

The key area of Service allows you to carry out all of your service processesefficiently and intelligently. It supports, among other things, resource planning aswell as contract and warranty processing.

The key area ofMarketing features a wide range of marketing tools such as toolsthat help you plan campaigns, model your target groups, recommend products,and carry out complex market analyses.

The key area of Analytics is based on SAP Business Information Warehouse andallows you to collect all relevant data about your customers and use the resultingknowledge to make operative and strategic decisions.

382 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 391: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of mySAP CRM in the Sales and Distribution Environment

Figure 142: Customer Contact Channels

mySAP CRM supports your customer relations via all contact channels.

The Interaction Center integrates all work processes and tasks in your ContactCenter.

The E-Commerce area offers a platform that allows your company to use theInternet as a profitable sales and interaction channel for business customers andconsumers.

The Field Applications area allow you to use marketing, sales, and servicefunctions in an offline environment for the external sales and service force.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 383

Page 392: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 10: Integrating SAP ECC and SAP CRM SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Explain the function ofmySAP CRM in the sales and distribution environment

384 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 393: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Explain the function ofmySAP CRM in the sales and distribution environment

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 385

Page 394: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit Summary SCM600

386 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 395: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 11IMG Overview

Unit OverviewThis unit provides a brief overview of the SAP Solution Manager. It also looksat potential Customizing settings in sales and distribution and explains how touse the IMG.

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

� Describe the IMG for implementing SAP ECC (ERP Central Component)

Unit ContentsLesson: Function of the IMG ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 387

Page 396: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 11: IMG Overview SCM600

Lesson: Function of the IMG

Lesson OverviewThis lesson provides an overview of SAP Solution Manager and a quick look atCustomizing in sales and distribution.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

� Describe the IMG for implementing SAP ECC (ERP Central Component)

Business ExampleThe project team analyzes SAP Solution Manager and the IMG so that the SAPsystem can be implemented more easily.

SAP Solution Manager

Figure 143: SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager supports you during the entire implementation phaseand helps you run SAP solutions. It is a platform that covers the lifecycle ofindustry solutions from the business blueprint through configuration to productionoperation. SAP Solution Manager provides central access to preconfiguredcontent, tools, and methods that you can use when evaluating and implementingyour systems.

388 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 397: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the IMG

SAP Solution Manager Operations allows you to configure, manage, and monitorsystems and business processes for a solution. You can use either comprehensivesolutions or individual systems, business processes, and software components. Italso allows you to set up your own solution support.

Figure 144: Benefits of SAP Solution Manager

SAP Solution Manager is a customer platform that enables SAP solutions to beimplemented and operated efficiently.

� The platform allows key tasks to be carried out on site during implementation.� Covers key ASAP concepts.� Improved concepts that take into account the unique features of implementing

SAP solutions.� Integrated platform that helps you implement and run SAP solutions.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 389

Page 398: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 11: IMG Overview SCM600

Figure 145: Using SAP Solution Manager During Implementation

390 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 399: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the IMG

SAP Solution Manager supports you during all evaluation and implementationphases. SAP Solution Manager allows you to carry out the following activities inan evaluation and implementation project:

� 1. Project Preparation: The roadmaps contain information and processescovering all phases of the implementation project. SAP Solution Manager isnot really used until after the evaluation phase. First, the project is defined inSAP Solution Manager. To do so, you enter administrative data for projectadministration purposes (details about the project deadline and resources,for example). In the project preparation phase, you define the scope of theproject and the system landscape required for implementing the solution.

� 2. Business Blueprint: You define a business blueprint by documenting theorganizational units, master data, business scenarios, and processes requiredfor implementing the solution. While defining the business blueprint, readthe documentation provided by SAP and your partners, create your ownproject documentation, and assign individual project steps to activities.

� 3. Implementation: You configure your business scenarios in thedevelopment system. You check the test scenarios provided with yoursolution and assign additional test scenarios to the individual processes andprocess steps. Carry out a consistency check for customizing the businessprocesses, that is, check whether the different application components havebeen properly aligned with each other. Customizing can be synchronizedby distribution. You can also organize tests. During configuration, you canreuse certain test scenarios. You can carry out a project analysis at any timeduring the project to gain information about the project status, test progress,or configuration.

� 4., 5. Production Preparation, Go-Live & Support: Execute the remote SAPservices and monitor their status. Monitor and administer your systems withreal-time warnings that are displayed in a system graphic, with weekly SAPEarlyWatch alert reports, and central system administration tools.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 391

Page 400: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 11: IMG Overview SCM600

IMG Overview

Figure 146: IMG: Tasks

The Implementation Guide (IMG) contains all Customizing activities necessaryfor implementing application components.

You can create Customizing projects in the SAP system. These help you tostructure and manage implementation. You can create and save cross-projectdocumentation.

You can create a separate IMG for each project.

You can work with Customizing transactions, project documentation, cross-projectdocumentation, and product management information using the project IMG.

Figure 147: Customer-Specific Configuration of the IMG

392 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 401: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Lesson: Function of the IMG

The IMG provides a checklist for the Customizing activities that a companyshould carry out when implementing an SAP system. The IMG is structuredhierarchically.

The structure of the IMG and the tools contained in IMG management (such asresource management and the interface to Microsoft Project) help the project teamto carry out Customizing activities in a systematic sequence.

The scope of the Reference IMG can be split up into separate projects that arein turn assigned to Project IMGs. You can use the Project IMG to maintainCustomizing activities, project and cross-project documentation, and informationrelevant for project management.

You can create Project IMG views to improve the structure. Similarly to the ProjectIMG, you can use these views to maintain Customizing transactions, project andcross-project documentation, and information relevant to project management.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 393

Page 402: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Unit 11: IMG Overview SCM600

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:� Describe the IMG for implementing SAP ECC (ERP Central Component)

394 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 403: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

SCM600 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:� Describe the IMG for implementing SAP ECC (ERP Central Component)

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 395

Page 404: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

Course Summary SCM600

Course SummaryYou should now be able to:

� Maintain the key master data in Sales and Distribution, and name therequired business structures

� Work with the various documents in Sales and Distribution� Describe the points of contact from Sales and Distributionto the materials

management, production (for example, make-to-order) and financialaccounting areas

� Perform analyses for Sales and Distribution processes

396 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2

Page 405: 1 scm600 sales and_distribution_processes1

FeedbackSAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure theaccuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections orsuggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in thecourse evaluation.

2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 397